Instruction Manual

TR200

Literature Order Number BAS-SVX19B-EN

Date August 2009
Supersedes
www.trane.com

For more information, contact your local Trane Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the
office or e-mail us at comfort@trane.com right to change design and specifications without notice.
BAS-SVX19B-EN

August 2009 BAS-SVX19B-EN

130R0447 MG12H222 Rev. 2009-08-20

*MG12H222*
Table of Contents
Safety 1-1
High Voltage Warning 1-2
Before Commencing Repair Work 1-4
Special Conditions 1-4
IT Line Power 1-5

Introduction 2-1

Introduction 2-1

Mechanical Installation 3-1

Before Starting 3-1

How to Install 3-1

Mechanical dimensions 3-3

Electrical Installation 4-1

Fuse Selection for Drives with Internal Drive Fusing 4-1

Fuse Replacement Table 4-4

How to Connect 4-4

Electrical Installation and Control Cables 4-6
Line power wiring overview 4-13
Motor wiring overview 4-25
DC bus connection 4-26
Relay connection 4-27
How to Test Motor and Direction of Rotation 4-32

How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive 5-1

How to operate the graphical keypad 5-1
Tips and Tricks 5-9

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive 6-1

TR200 Instruction Manual -1

 How to Program 6-1
Quick Menu mode 6-1
Function Set-ups 6-9

Parameter Lists TR200 6-61

Default settings 6-61
0-** Operation and Display 6-62
1-** Load / Motor 6-64
2-** Brakes 6-65
3-** Reference / Ramps 6-66
4-** Limits / Warnings 6-67
5-** Digital In / Out 6-68
6-** Analog In / Out 6-70
8-** Communication and Options 6-71
11-** LonWorks 6-72
13-** Smart Logic Controller 6-73
14-** Special Functions 6-74
15-** Adjustable Frequency Drive Information 6-75
16-** Data Readouts 6-77
18-** Info & Readouts 6-79
20-** FC Closed-loop 6-80
21-** Ext. Closed-loop 6-81
22-** Application Functions 6-83
23-** Time-based Functions 6-84
24-** Application Functions 2 6-85

Dedicated factory settings 6-86

Troubleshooting 7-1

Alarms and Warnings 7-1

Fault Messages 7-5

-2 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Acoustic Noise or Vibration 7-12

Specifications 8-1

General Specifications 8-1

Special Conditions 8-12

Index 9-1

TR200 Instruction Manual -3

-4 TR200 Instruction Manual
Safety
Warnings, Cautions and Notices
Note that warnings, cautions and notices appear at appropriate intervals throughout this manual. Warnings are
provided to alert installing contractors to potential hazards that could result in personal injury or death. Cautions
are designed to alert personnel to hazardous situations that could result in personal injury, while notices indicate
a situation that could result in equipment or property-damage-only accidents.
Your personal safety and the proper operation of this machine depend upon the strict observance of these
precautions.

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It could also
be used to alert against unsafe practices.

NOTE
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property-damage only accidents.

Note
Indicates something important to be noted by the reader.

✮ Indicates default setting

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures
to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in
death or serious injury.

TR200 Instruction Manual 1-1

Safety

High Voltage Warning

WARNING
The voltage of the adjustable frequency drive is dangerous whenever it is connected to line power. Incorrect installation
of the motor or adjustable frequency drive could result indeath, serious injury or damage to the equipment. Conse-
quently, it is essential to comply with the instructions in this manual as well as local and national rules and safety
regulations.

Safety Note

WARNING
The voltage of the adjustable frequency drive is dangerous whenever connected to line power. Incorrect installation of
the motor, adjustable frequency drive or serial communication bus could result in death, serious personal injury or
damage to the equipment. Consequently, the instructions in this manual, as well as national and local rules and safety
regulations, must be complied with.

WARNING
Failure to follow instructions below could result in death or serious injury.

Safety Regulations
1. The adjustable frequency drive must be disconnected from line power if repair work is to be carried out.
Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before
removing motor and line power plugs.
2. The [STOP/RESET] key on the keypad of the adjustable frequency drive does not disconnect the equipment
from line power and is thus not to be used as a safety switch.
3. Correct protective grounding of the equipment must be established, the user must be protected against
supply voltage, and the motor must be protected against overload in accordance with applicable national
and local regulations.
4. The ground leakage currents are higher than 3.5 mA.
5. Protection against motor overload is set by par.1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. If this function is desired,
set par.1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to data value [ETR trip] (default value) or data value [ETR warning].
Note: The function is initialized at 1.16 x rated motor current and rated motor frequency. For the North
American market: The ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload protection in accordance with NEC.
6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and line power supply while the adjustable frequency drive is con-
nected to line power. Make sure that the line power supply has been disconnected and that the necessary
time has passed before removing motor and line power plugs.
7. Please note that the adjustable frequency drive has more voltage inputs than L1, L2 and L3, when load
sharing (linking of DC intermediate circuit) and external 24 Vdc have been installed. Make sure that all
voltage inputs have been disconnected and that the necessary time has passed before commencing repair
work.

1-2 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Safety

Installation at high altitudes

WARNING
Installation at high altitude:
380–500 V, enclosure A, B and C: At altitudes above 6,561 ft [2 km], please contact Trane regarding PELV/Class II.
380–500 V, enclosure D, E and F: At altitudes above 9,842 ft [3 km] , please contact Trane regarding PELV/Class II.
If the drive is to be installed over 6,561 ft [2000 m] altitude, then the PELV specifications are not fulfilled anymore, i.e.,
the distances between components and critical parts become too small. To maintain the clearance for functional insu-
lation anyway, the risk for overvoltage must be reduced by means of external protective devices or some kind of galvanic
isolation. De-rating should also be taken into consideration, since cooling the drive is more difficult at high altitude.
Please contact Trane in such cases.
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Warning against Unintended Start
1. The motor can be brought to a stop by means of digital commands, bus commands, references or a local stop,
while the adjustable frequency drive is connected to line power. If personal safety considerations make it necessary
to ensure that no unintended start occurs, these stop functions are not sufficient.
2. While parameters are being changed, the motor may start. Consequently, the stop key [STOP/RESET] must always
be activated, following which data can be modified.
3. A motor that has been stopped may start if faults occur in the electronics of the adjustable frequency drive, or if a
temporary overload or a fault in the supply line power or the motor connection ceases.
Consequently, disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Failure to follow recommendations could
result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Touching the electrical parts could result in death or serious injury - even after the equipment has been disconnected
from line power.

Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been disconnected, such as external 24 VDC, load sharing (linkage
of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor connection for kinetic backup. Refer to the Instruction Manual
for further safety guidelines.
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
The adjustable frequency drive DC link capacitors remain charged after power has been disconnected. To avoid an
electrical shock hazard, disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power before carrying out maintenance.
Wait at least as follows before doing service on the adjustable frequency drive:
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death or serious injury.

TR200 Instruction Manual 1-3

Safety

Voltage (V) Min. Waiting Time (Minutes)

4 15 20 30 40
200 - 240 1.5–5 hp 7.5–60 hp
[1.1–3.7 kW] [5.5–45 kW]

380 - 480 1.5–10 hp 15–125 hp 150–350 hp 450–1350 hp

[1.1–7.5 kW] [11–90 kW] [110–250 kW] [315–1000 kW]

525 - 600 1.5–10 hp 15–125 hp

[1.1–7.5 kW] [11–90 kW]

525 - 690 15–125 hp 45–400 kW 450–1400 kW

[11–90 kW]

Be aware that there may be high voltage on the DC link even when the LEDs are turned off.

Before Commencing Repair Work

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
1. Disconnect the adjustable frequency drive from line power.
2. Disconnect DC bus terminals 88 and 89
3. Wait at least the time mentioned above in the section General Warning.
4. Remove motor cable
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death or serious injury.

Special Conditions
Electrical ratings:
The rating indicated on the nameplate of the adjustable frequency drive is based on a typical 3-phase line power
supply within the specified voltage, current and temperature ranges, which are expected to be used in most
applications.

The adjustable frequency drives also support other special applications, which affect the electrical ratings of the
adjustable frequency drive.
Special conditions that affect the electrical ratings might be:

• Single phase applications.

• High temperature applications that require derating of the electrical ratings.
• Marine applications with more severe environmental conditions.
Other applications might also affect the electrical ratings.

Consult the relevant sections in this manual and in the TR200 Design Guide for information about the electrical
ratings.

1-4 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Safety

Installation requirements:
The overall electrical safety of the adjustable frequency drive requires special installation considerations re-
garding:

• Fuses and circuit breakers for overcurrent and short-circuit protection

• Selection of power cables (line power, motor, brake, load sharing and relay)
• Grid configuration (grounded delta transformer leg, IT,TN, etc.)
• Safety of low-voltage ports (PELV conditions).
Consult the relevant clauses in these instructions and in the TR200 Design Guide for information about the
installation requirements.

IT Line Power

WARNING
Do not connect adjustable frequency drives with RFI filters to line power supplies with a voltage between phase and
ground of more than 440 V for 400 V drives and 760 V for 690 V drives.
For 400 VT IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 440 V between phase and ground.
For 690 VT IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 760 V between phase and ground.
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death or serious injury.

Par.14-50 RFI 1 can be used to disconnect the internal RFI capacitors from the RFI filter to ground.

Software Version and Approvals: TR200

TR200
Software version:2.0.x

This manual can be used with all TR200 adjustable frequency drives with software version 2.0.x
The software version number can be seen from par.15-43 Software Version.

Disposal Instructions

Equipment containing electrical components may not be disposed of together

with domestic waste.
It must be separately collected with electrical and electronic waste according to
local and currently valid legislation.

TR200 Instruction Manual 1-5

Safety

1-6 TR200 Instruction Manual

Introduction
Introduction
Available Literature for TR200
- The Instruction Manual provides the necessary information for getting the drive up and running.
- Instruction Manual TR200 High Power
- The Design Guide contains all the technical information about the drive and customer design and applica-
tions.
- The Programming Guide provides information on how to program and includes complete parameter de-
scriptions.
x = Revision number
yy = Language code

Trane technical literature is available in print from your local Trane Sales Office or online at: www.trane.com/
vfd

TR200 Instruction Manual 2-1

Introduction

Abbreviations and Standards

Abbreviations: Terms: SI units: I-P units:

a Acceleration m/s2 ft/s2
AWG American wire gauge
Auto Tune Automatic Motor Tuning
°C Celsius
I Current A Amp
ILIM Current limit
Line power supply with star point in transformer
IT line power
floating to ground.
Joule Energy J = N∙m ft-lb, Btu
°F Fahrenheit
FC Adjustable Frequency Drive
f Frequency Hz Hz
kHz Kilohertz kHz kHz
keypad Local Control Panel
mA Milliampere
ms Millisecond
min Minute
M-TYPE Motor Type Dependent
Nm Newton meters in-lbs
IM,N Nominal motor current
fM,N Nominal motor frequency
PM,N Nominal motor power
UM,N Nominal motor voltage
par. Parameter
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
Watt Power W Btu/hr, hp
Pascal Pressure Pa = N/m² psi, psf, ft of water
IINV Rated Inverter Output Current
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
SR Size Related
T Temperature C F
t Time s s, hr
TLIM Torque limit
U Voltage V V

Table 2. 1: Abbreviation and standards table

Adjustable frequency drive identification

Below is an example of an identification label. This label is situated on the adjustable frequency drive and shows
the type and the options with which the unit is equipped. See below for details of how to read the Type code
string (T/C).

Figure 2. 1: This example shows an identification label.

NOTE: Please have the T/C (type code) number and serial number ready before contacting Trane.

2-2 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Introduction

Type Code String low and medium power

TR 2 0

Description Pos Possible choice

Product group & Adjustable Frequency
1-6 TR-200
Drive Series
Power rating 8-10 1.5–1600 hp [1.1–1200 kW] (P1K1 - P1M2)
Number of phases 11 Three phases (T)
T 2: 200–240 VAC
AC line voltage 11-12
T 4: 380–480 VAC
E20: IP20
E21: IP 21/NEMA Type 1
E55: IP 55/NEMA Type 12
Enclosure 13-15
E66: IP66
P21: IP21/NEMA Type 1 w/backplate
P55: IP55/NEMA Type 12 w/backplate
H1: RFI filter class A1/B
H2: RFI filter class A2
RFI filter 16-17
H3: RFI filter class A1/B (reduced cable length)
Hx: No RFI filter
Brake 18 X: No brake chopper included
G: Graphical Local Control Panel (keypad)
Display 19
X: No Local Control Panel
X. No coated PCB
Coating PCB 20
C: Coated PCB
X: No line power disconnect switch and load sharing
1: With line power disconnect switch (IP55 only)
Line power option 21 8: Line power disconnect and load sharing
D: Load Sharing
See Chapter 8 for max. cable sizes.
X: Standard
Adaptation 22
0: European metric thread in cable entries.
Adaptation 23 Reserved
Software release 24-27 Current software
Software language 28
AX: No options
A4: MCA 104 DeviceNet
A options 29-30
AF: MCA 115 LonWorks
AE: MCA 116 BACnet gateway
BX: No option
B options 31-32 BK: MCB 101 General purpose I/O option
BP: MCB 105 Relay option
C0 options MCO 33-34 CX: No options
C1 options 35 X: No options
C option software 36-37 XX: Standard software
DX: No option
D options 38-39
D0: DC backup

Table 2. 2: Type code description.

TR200 Instruction Manual 2-3

Introduction

2-4 TR200 Instruction Manual

Mechanical Installation
Before Starting
Checklist
When unpacking the adjustable frequency drive, make sure that the unit is undamaged and complete. Use the
following table to identify the packaging:

B1/B3 B2/B4 C1/C3 C2*/C4

Enclosure A2 A3 A5
(IP (IP (IP (IP
type: (IP 20-21) (IP 20-21) (IP 55-66)
20-21-55-66) 20-21-55-66) 20-21-55-66) 20-21-55-66)

Unit size (kW):

5.5–11/ 15/ 18.5–30/ 37-45/
200–240 V 1.1–2.2 3.0–3.7 1.1–3.7
5.5–11 15–18.5 22–30 37-45
11–18.5/ 22-30/ 37-55/ 75-90/
380–480 V 1.1–4.0 5.5–7.5 1.1–7.5
11–18.5 22-37 45-55 75-90
11–18.5/ 22-30/ 37-55/ 75-90/
525–600 V 1.1–7.5 1.1–7.5
11–18.5 22-37 45-55 75-90

Table 3. 1: Unpacking table

Please note that it is recommended to have a selection of screwdrivers (phillips or cross-thread screwdriver and
torx), a side-cutter, drill and knife handy for unpacking and mounting the adjustable frequency drive. The pack-
aging for these enclosures contains, as shown: Accessories bag(s), documentation and the unit. Depending on
options fitted, there may be one or two bags and one or more booklets.

How to Install

TR200 Instruction Manual 3-1

3-2
Mechanical front views
A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Mechanical Installation

130BA768.10

IP20/21
IP20/21* IP55/66 IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20/21* IP20/21* IP21/55/66 IP21/55/66 IP20/21* IP20/21*
*

Figure 3. 2: Top and bottom mounting holes. (B4+C3+C4 only)

Figure 3. 1: Top and bottom mounting holes.

Accessory bags containing necessary brackets, screws and connectors are included with the drives upon delivery.

All measurements in mm.

* IP21 can be established with a kit as described in the section: IP 21/ IP 4X/ TYPE 1 Enclosure Kit in the Design Guide.

TR200 Instruction Manual

 Mechanical dimensions
Mechanical dimensions
Frame size (kW): A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
200–240 V 1.1–2.2 3.0–3.7 1.1–3.7 5.5–11 15 5.5–11 15–18.5 18.5–30 37-45 22-30 37-45
380–480 V 1.1–4.0 5.5–7.5 1.1–7.5 11–18.5 22-30 11–18.5 22–37 37–55 75-90 45-55 75-90
525–600 V 1.1–7.5 1.1–7.5 11–18.5 22-30 11–18.5 22–37 37–55 75-90 45-55 75-90
21/ 21/ 21/
21/ 55/66
IP 20 21 20 21 55/66 55/66 55/66 20 20 55/66 20 20

TR200 Instruction Manual

Type
NEMA Chassis Type 1 Chassis Type 1 Type 12 Type Type Chassis Chassis Type Chassis Chassis
1/12
1/12 1/12 1/12
Height (mm)
Enclosure A** 246 372 246 372 420 480 650 350 460 680 770 490 600
..with de-coupling plate A2 374 - 374 - - - - 419 595 - - 630 800
Backplate A1 268 375 268 375 420 480 650 399 520 680 770 550 660
Distance between
a 257 350 257 350 402 454 624 380 495 648 739 521 631
mount. holes
Width (mm)
Enclosure B 90 90 130 130 242 242 242 165 231 308 370 308 370
With one C option B 130 130 170 170 242 242 242 205 231 308 370 308 370
Backplate B 90 90 130 130 242 242 242 165 231 308 370 308 370
Distance between
b 70 70 110 110 215 210 210 140 200 272 334 270 330
mount. holes
Depth (mm)
Without option A/B C 205 205 205 205 200 260 260 248 242 310 335 333 333
With option A/B C* 220 220 220 220 200 260 260 262 242 310 335 333 333
Screw holes (mm)
c 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.2 12 12 8 - 12 12 - -
Diameter ø d 11 11 11 11 12 19 19 12 - 19 19 - -
Diameter ø e 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 6.5 9 9 6.8 8.5 9.0 9.0 8.5 8.5
f 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 7.9 15 9.8 9.8 17 17
Max weight
4.9 5.3 6.6 7.0 14 23 27 12 23.5 45 65 35 50
(kg)
* Depth of enclosure will vary with different options installed.
** The free space requirements are above and below the bare enclosure height measurement A. See section Mechanical Mounting for further information.

3-3
Mechanical Installation
3-4
Accessory bags
Accessory Bags: Find the following parts included in the adjustable frequency drive accessory bags
Mechanical Installation

Frame sizes A1, A2 and A3 Frame size A5 Frame sizes B1 and B2 Frame sizes C1 and C2

Frame size B3 Frame size B4 Frame size C3 Frame size C4

1 + 2 only available in units with brake chopper. For DC link connection (load sharing) the connector 1 can be ordered separately (Code no. 130B1064)

TR200 Instruction Manual

 Mechanical Installation

Mechanical Mounting
All IP20 enclosure sizes as well as IP21/ IP55 enclosure sizes except A2 and A3 allow side-by-side installation.

If the IP 21 Enclosure kit (130B1122 or 130B1123) is used on enclosure A2 or A3,, there must be a minimum of
2 in [50 mm] of clearance between drives.

For optimal cooling conditions, allow a free air passage above and below the adjustable frequency drive. See
table below.

Air passage for different enclosures

En-
clo- A2 A3 A5 B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
sure:

a
100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 225 200 225
(mm):

b
100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 225 200 225
(mm):

1. Drill holes in accordance with the measurements given.

2. You must provide screws suitable for the surface on which you want to mount the adjustable frequency
drive. Re-tighten all four screws.

130BA219.10

130BA228.10

Table 3. 2: Mounting frame sizes A5, B1, B2, B3, B4, C1, C2, C3 and C4 on a non-solid back wall, the drive must
be provided with a backplate A due to insufficient cooling air over the heatsink.

With heavier drives (B4, C3, C4), use a lift. First wall-mount the 2 lower bolts, then lift the drive onto the lower
bolts. Finally, fasten the drive against the wall with the 2 top bolts.

TR200 Instruction Manual 3-5

Mechanical Installation

Safety Requirements of Mechanical Installation

WARNING
Pay attention to the requirements that apply to integration and the field mounting kit. Observe the information in the
list to avoid serious injury or equipment damage, especially when installing large units.

NOTE
The adjustable frequency drive is cooled by air circulation.
To protect the unit from overheating, it must be ensured that the ambient temperature does not exceed the maximum
temperature stated for the adjustable frequency drive, and that the 24-hour average temperature is not excee-
ded. Locate the maximum temperature and 24-hour average in the paragraph Derating for Ambient Temperature.
If the ambient temperature is in the range of 113°–131°F [45°C–55°], derating of the adjustable frequency drive will
become relevant, see Derating for Ambient Temperature.
The service life of the adjustable frequency drive is reduced if derating for ambient temperature is not taken into account.

Field Mounting
For field mounting the IP 21/IP 4X top/,TYPE 1 kits or IP 54/55 units are recommended.

3-6 TR200 Instruction Manual

Electrical Installation
Fuse Selection for Drives with Internal Drive Fusing
For drives ordered with internal drive fusing
The figures below show where input line power, output motor power, and relays are located for drives with
internal fusing. Replacement fuse ratings for internal fuses are also provided.

130BX300.10
1. Relay terminals
2. Motor power terminals
3. Input power terminals

3
Figure 4. 1: A2, A3

1. Drive fuses
2. Relay terminals
3. Motor power terminals
4. Input power terminals

Figure 4. 2: A5

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-1

Electrical Installation

For B1 and B2 frame sizes, motor and relay connections are located under the drive fuse block. To access these
connectors, loosen 3 T-20 screws and move fuse block out of the way. The fuse block does not need to be
disassembled

1. Loosen screws
2. Drive fuses
3. Motor power terminals (remove fuse plate to
connect)
4. Relay terminals
5. Input power terminals

Figure 4. 3: B1

1. Loosen screws
2. Drive fuses
3. Relay terminals
4. Input power terminals
5. Motor power terminals (remove fuse plate to
connect)

Figure 4. 4: B2

4-2 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

1. Relay terminals
2. Drive fuses
3. Motor power terminals
4. Input power terminals

Figure 4. 5: C1

1. Relay terminals
2. Drive fuses
3. Motor power terminals
4. Input power terminals

Figure 4. 6: C2

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-3

Electrical Installation

Fuse Replacement Table

Drive Rating TR200

HP kW 208–230V 460–480V 575–600V
1.5 1.1 LP-CC-10 10A, 600V Class CC LP-CC-6 6A, 600V, Class CC LP-CC-5 5A, 600V, Class CC
2 1.5 LP-CC-15 15A, 600V Class CC LP-CC-10 10A, 600V, Class CC LP-CC-5 A, 600V, Class CC
3 2.2 LP-CC-20 20A, 600V Class CC LP-CC-10 10A, 600V, Class CC LP-CC-10 10A, 600V, Class CC
5 3.7/4 LP-CC-30 30A, 600V Class CC LP-CC-20 20A, 600V, Class CC LP-CC-10 10A, 600V, Class CC
7.5 5.5 JJN-50 50A, 600V, Class T LP-CC-25 25A, 600V, Class CC LP-CC-20 20A, 600V, Class CC
10 7.5 JJN-50 50A, 600V, Class T LP-CC-30 30A, 600V, Class CC LP-CC-20 20A, 600V, Class CC
15 11 JJN-60 60A, 600V, Class T JJN-40 40A, 600V, Class T n/a
20 15 JJN-80 80A, 600V, Class T JJN-40 40A, 600V, Class T n/a
25 18.5 JJN-125 125A, 600V, Class T JJN-50 50A, 600V, Class T n/a
30 22 JJN-125 125A, 600V, Class T JJN-60 60A, 600V, Class T n/a
40 30 FWX-150A 200A, 500V JJN-80 80A, 600V, Class T n/a
50 37 FWX-150A 200A, 500V JJN-100 100A, 600V, Class T n/a
60 45 FWX-250A 250A, 500V JJN-150 150A, 600V, Class T n/a
75 55 n/a JJN-150 150A, 600V, Class T n/a
100 75 n/a FWX-200A 200A, 500V n/a
125 90 n/a FWX-250A 250A, 500V n/a

How to Connect
Cables general
NOTE: For the TR200 High Power series line power and motor connections, please see TR200 High Power In-
struction Manual MG.12.KX.YY.

NOTE
Cables General
All cabling must comply with national and local regulations on cable cross-sections and ambient temperature. Copper
(140°–167°F [60°–75°C]) conductors are recommended.

4-4 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Details of terminal tightening torques.

Power (kW) Torque (Nm)
DC
Enclo- 200– 525–600 con-
380–480V Line power Motor Brake Ground Relay
sure 240V V nec-
tion
A2 1.1–3.0 1.1–4.0 1.1–4.0 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3 0.6
A3 3.7 5.5–7.5 5.5–7.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3 0.6
A5 1.1–3.7 1.1–7.5 1.1–7.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3 0.6
B1 5.5–11 11–18.5 11–18.5 1.8 1.8 1.5 1.5 3 0.6
- 22 22 4.5 4.5 3.7 3.7 3 0.6
B2
15 30 30 4.52) 4.52) 3.7 3.7 3 0.6
B3 5.5–11 11–18.5 11–18.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3 0.6
B4 15–18.5 22 - 37 22 - 37 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3 0.6
C1 18.5–30 37 - 55 37 - 55 10 10 10 10 3 0.6
C2 37 - 45 75 - 90 75 - 90 14/241) 14/241) 14 14 3 0.6
C3 22 - 30 45 - 55 45 - 55 10 10 10 10 3 0.6
C4 37 - 45 75 - 90 75 - 90 14/24 1) 14/24 1) 14 14 3 0.6
High Power
DC
Enclo- con-
380-480 V Line power Motor Brake Ground Relay
sure nec-
tion
D1/D3 110-132 19 19 9.6 9.6 19 0.6
D2/D4 160-250 19 19 9.6 9.6 19 0.6
E1/E2 315-450 19 19 19 9.6 19 0.6
F1-
500-710 710-900 19 19 19 9.6 19 0.6
F33)
F2-
800-1000 1000-1400 19 19 19 9.6 19 0.6
F43)

1) For different cable dimensions x/y, where x ≤0.147 in² [95 mm²] and y ≥0.147 in² [95 mm²].
2) Cable dimensions above 25 hp [18.5 kW] ≥ 0.0542 in2 [35 mm2] and below 30 hp [22 kW] ≤ 0.0155 in2 [10
mm2].
For data on the F frame sizes, consult the TR200 High Power Instruction Manual.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-5

Electrical Installation

Electrical Installation and Control Cables

Figure 4. 7: Diagram showing all electrical terminals.

4-6 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Terminal number Terminal description Parameter number Factory default

1+2+3 Terminal 1+2+3-Relay1 5-40 No operation
4+5+6 Terminal 4+5+6-Relay2 5-40 No operation
12 Terminal 12 Supply - +24 V DC
13 Terminal 13 Supply - +24 V DC
18 Terminal 18 Digital Input 5-10 Start
19 Terminal 19 Digital Input 5-11 No operation
20 Terminal 20 - Common
27 Terminal 27 Digital Input/Output 5-12/5-30 Coast inverse
29 Terminal 29 Digital Input/Output 5-13/5-31 Jog
32 Terminal 32 Digital Input 5-14 No operation
33 Terminal 33 Digital Input 5-15 No operation
42 Terminal 42 Analog Output 6-50 Speed 0-HighLim
53 Terminal 53 Analog Input 3-15/6-1*/20-0* Reference
54 Terminal 54 Analog Input 3-15/6-2*/20-0* Feedback

Table 4. 1: Terminal connections

Very long control cables and analog signals may, in rare cases and depending on the installation, result in 50/60
Hz ground loops due to noise from line power supply cables.

If this occurs, break the shield or insert a 100 nF capacitor between shield and chassis.

Note
The common of digital / analog inputs and outputs should be connected to separate common terminals 20, 39,
and 55. This will prevent ground current interference among groups. For example, it prevents switching on
digital inputs from disturbing analog inputs.

NOTE
Control cables must be shielded/armored.

Fuses
Branch Circuit Protection

WARNING
In order to protect the installation against electrical and fire hazard, all branch circuits in an installation, switch gear,
machines etc., must be short-circuit and over-current protected according to NEC and your local/state code.
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Short-circuit protection:
The adjustable frequency drive must be protected against short-circuit to avoid electrical or fire hazard. Trane recom-
mends using the fuses mentioned below to protect service personnel and equipment in case of an internal failure in
the drive. The adjustable frequency drive provides full short-circuit protection in case of a short-circuit on the motor
output.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-7

Electrical Installation

WARNING
Overcurrent protection:
Provide overload protection to avoid fire hazard due to overheating of the cables in the installation. Fuses or circuit
breakers can be used to provide the overcurrent protection in the installation. Overcurrent protection must always be
carried out according to NEC and your local/state code.

NOTE
Note Fusing not UL-compliant
If UL/cUL is not to be complied with, Trane recommends using the fuses mentioned in the table below, which will
ensure compliance with EN50178.
In case of malfunction, not following the recommendation may result in unnecessary damage to the adjustable fre-
quency drive.

4-8 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

UL compliance/non-compliance

Non-UL compliance fuses

Adjustable frequency drive Max. fuse size Voltage Type

200–240 V - T2
1K1-1K5 16A1 200–240 V type gG
2K2 25A1 200–240 V type gG
3K0 25A1 200–240 V type gG
3K7 35A1 200–240 V type gG
5K5 50A1 200–240 V type gG
7K5 63A1 200–240 V type gG
11K 63A1 200–240 V type gG
15K 80A1 200–240 V type gG
18K5 125A1 200–240 V type gG
22K 125A1 200–240 V type gG
30K 160A1 200–240 V type gG
37K 200A1 200–240 V type aR
45K 250A1 200–240 V type aR
380–480 V - T4
1K1-1K5 10A1 380–500 V type gG
2K2-3K0 16A1 380–500 V type gG
4K0-5K5 25A1 380–500 V type gG
7K5 35A1 380–500 V type gG
11K–15K 63A1 380–500 V type gG
18K 63A1 380–500 V type gG
22K 63A1 380–500 V type gG
30K 80A1 380–500 V type gG
37K 100A1 380–500 V type gG
45K 125A1 380–500 V type gG
55K 160A1 380–500 V type gG
75K 250A1 380–500 V type aR
90K 250A1 380–500 V type aR
1) Max. fuses - see national/international regulations to select an appropriate fuse size.

Table 4. 2: Non-UL fuses 200 V to 480 V

NOTE
If UL/cUL is not to be complied with, we recommend using the following fuses, which will ensure compliance with
EN50178:

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-9

Electrical Installation

Adjustable Frequency Drive Voltage Type

P110 - P250 380–480 V type gG
P315 - P450 380–480 V type gR

Table 4. 3: Compliance with EN50178

UL compliance fuses

Adjusta-
ble fre- Ferraz- Ferraz-
Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse
quency Shawmut Shawmut
drive
200–240 V
kW Type RK1 Type J Type T Type RK1 Type RK1 Type CC Type RK1
K25-K37 KTN-R05 JKS-05 JJN-05 5017906-005 KLN-R005 ATM-R05 A2K-05R
K55-1K1 KTN-R10 JKS-10 JJN-10 5017906-010 KLN-R10 ATM-R10 A2K-10R
1K5 KTN-R15 JKS-15 JJN-15 5017906-015 KLN-R15 ATM-R15 A2K-15R
2K2 KTN-R20 JKS-20 JJN-20 5012406-020 KLN-R20 ATM-R20 A2K-20R
3K0 KTN-R25 JKS-25 JJN-25 5012406-025 KLN-R25 ATM-R25 A2K-25R
3K7 KTN-R30 JKS-30 JJN-30 5012406-030 KLN-R30 ATM-R30 A2K-30R
5K5 KTN-R50 JKS-50 JJN-50 5012406-050 KLN-R50 - A2K-50R
7K5 KTN-R50 JKS-60 JJN-60 5012406-050 KLN-R60 - A2K-50R
11K KTN-R60 JKS-60 JJN-60 5014006-063 KLN-R60 A2K-60R A2K-60R
15K KTN-R80 JKS-80 JJN-80 5014006-080 KLN-R80 A2K-80R A2K-80R
18K5 KTN-R125 JKS-150 JJN-125 2028220-125 KLN-R125 A2K-125R A2K-125R
22K KTN-R125 JKS-150 JJN-125 2028220-125 KLN-R125 A2K-125R A2K-125R
30K FWX-150 - - 2028220-150 L25S-150 A25X-150 A25X-150
37K FWX-200 - - 2028220-200 L25S-200 A25X-200 A25X-200
45K FWX-250 - - 2028220-250 L25S-250 A25X-250 A25X-250

Table 4. 4: UL fuses, 200–240 V

4-10 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Adjusta-
ble fre- Ferraz- Ferraz-
Bussmann Bussmann Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse
quency Shawmut Shawmut
drive
380–480 V, 525–600 V
kW Type RK1 Type J Type T Type RK1 Type RK1 Type CC Type RK1
K37-1K1 KTS-R6 JKS-6 JJS-6 5017906-006 KLS-R6 ATM-R6 A6K-6R
1K5-2K2 KTS-R10 JKS-10 JJS-10 5017906-010 KLS-R10 ATM-R10 A6K-10R
3K0 KTS-R15 JKS-15 JJS-15 5017906-016 KLS-R16 ATM-R16 A6K-16R
4K0 KTS-R20 JKS-20 JJS-20 5017906-020 KLS-R20 ATM-R20 A6K-20R
5K5 KTS-R25 JKS-25 JJS-25 5017906-025 KLS-R25 ATM-R25 A6K-25R
7K5 KTS-R30 JKS-30 JJS-30 5012406-032 KLS-R30 ATM-R30 A6K-30R
11K KTS-R40 JKS-40 JJS-40 5014006-040 KLS-R40 - A6K-40R
15K KTS-R40 JKS-40 JJS-40 5014006-040 KLS-R40 - A6K-40R
18K KTS-R50 JKS-50 JJS-50 5014006-050 KLS-R50 - A6K-50R
22K KTS-R60 JKS-60 JJS-60 5014006-063 KLS-R60 - A6K-60R
30K KTS-R80 JKS-80 JJS-80 2028220-100 KLS-R80 - A6K-80R
37K KTS-R100 JKS-100 JJS-100 2028220-125 KLS-R100 A6K-100R
45K KTS-R125 JKS-150 JJS-150 2028220-125 KLS-R125 A6K-125R
55K KTS-R150 JKS-150 JJS-150 2028220-160 KLS-R150 A6K-150R
75K FWH-220 - - 2028220-200 L50S-225 A50-P225
90K FWH-250 - - 2028220-250 L50S-250 A50-P250

Table 4. 5: UL fuses, 380–600 V

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-11

Electrical Installation

Grounding and IT line power

The line power is connected to the main disconnect switch if this is included.

NOTE
Make sure that the AC line voltage corresponds to the AC line voltage of the adjustable frequency drive nameplate.

Figure 4. 8: Terminals for line power and grounding.

WARNING
IT Line Power
Do not connect 400 V adjustable frequency drives with RFI filters to line power supplies with a voltage between phase
and ground of more than 440 V.
For IT line power and delta ground (grounded leg), AC line voltage may exceed 440 V between phase and ground.
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death or serious injury.

4-12 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Line power wiring overview
Enclosure: B1 B2 C1 C2
A2 A3 A5 B3 B4 C3 C4
(IP 21/IP 55/ (IP 21/IP 55/ (IP 21/IP (IP 21/IP
(IP 20/IP 21) (IP 20/IP 21) (IP 55/IP 66) (IP 20) (IP 20) (IP 20) (IP20)
IP 66) IP 66) 55/66) 55/66)

TR200 Instruction Manual

130BA768.10

Motor size:
1.1–3.0 3.7 1.1–3.7 5.5–11 15 5.5–11 15–18.5 18.5–30 37–45 22–30 37–45
200–240 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
1.1–4.0 5.5–7.5 1.1–7.5 11–18.5 22–30 11–18.5 22–37 37–55 75–90 45–55 75–90
380–480 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
1.1–7.5 1.1–7.5 11–18.5 22–30 11–18.5 22–37 37–55 75–90 45–55 75–90
525–600 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
Goto:

Table 4. 6: Line power wiring table.

Electrical Installation

4-13
Electrical Installation

AC line input connections for A2 and A3

Figure 4. 9: First mount the two screws on the mounting plate, slide it into place and tighten fully.

Figure 4. 10: When mounting cables, first mount and tighten ground cable.

WARNING
The ground connection cable cross-section must be at least 0.016 in2 [10 mm2] or 2 rated line power wires terminated
separately according to EN 50178/IEC 61800-5-1.
Failure to comply can result in high voltages on the chassis, which could result in death or serious injury, due to elec-
trocution.

4-14 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Figure 4. 11: Then mount line power plug and tighten wires.

Figure 4. 12: Finally, tighten support bracket on line power wires.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-15

Electrical Installation

AC line input connections for A5

Figure 4. 13: How to connect to line power and grounding without a line power disconnect switch. Note that a cable
clamp is used.

Figure 4. 14: How to connect to line power and grounding with a line power disconnect switch.

4-16 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

AC Line Input Connections for B1, B2 and B3

Figure 4. 16: How to connect to line power and

grounding for B3 without RFI.

Figure 4. 15: How to connect to line power and

grounding for B1 and B2

Figure 4. 17: How to connect to line power and

grounding for B3 with RFI.

NOTE: For correct cable dimensions, please see the section General Specifications at the back of this manual.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-17

Electrical Installation

AC line input connections for B4, C1 and C2

Figure 4. 18: How to connect to line power and

grounding for B4.
Figure 4. 19: How to connect to line power and
grounding for C1 and C2.

AC line input connections for C3 and C4

Figure 4. 20: How to connect C3 to line power and Figure 4. 21: How to connect C4 to line power and
grounding. grounding.

4-18 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

How to Connect Motor - Introduction

See section General Specifications for correct dimensioning of motor cable cross-section and length.

• Use a shielded/armored motor cable to comply with EMC emission specifications (or install the cable in
a metal conduit).
• Keep the motor cable as short as possible to reduce the noise level and leakage currents.
• Connect the motor cable shield/armor to both the decoupling plate of the adjustable frequency drive
and to the metal of the motor. (The same applies to both ends of the metal conduit if used instead of
a shield.)
• Make the shield connections with the largest possible surface area (by using a cable clamp or an EMC
cable connector). This is done by using the supplied installation devices in the adjustable frequency
drive.
• Avoid terminating the shield by twisting the ends (pigtails), as this will spoil high frequency shielding
effects.
• If it is necessary to break the continuity of the shield to install a motor isolator or motor relay, the con-
tinuity must be maintained with the lowest possible HF impedance.

Cable length and cross-section

The adjustable frequency drive has been tested with a given length of cable and a given cross-section of that
cable. If the cross-section is increased, the cable capacitance - and thus the leakage current - may increase,
thereby requiring that the cable length is reduced accordingly.

Switching frequency
When adjustable frequency drives are used together with sine wave filters to reduce the acoustic noise from a
motor, the switching frequency must be set according to the sine wave filter instructions in par.14-01 Switching
Frequency.
Precautions while using aluminum conductors
Aluminum conductors are not recommended for cable cross-sections less than 0.054 in² [35 mm²]. Terminals
can accept aluminum conductors, but the conductor surface has to be clean, oxidation must be removed, and
the area must be sealed by neutral acid-free Vaseline grease before the conductor is connected.
Furthermore, the terminal screw must be retightened after two days due to the softness of the aluminum. It is
crucial to ensure that the connection makes a gas tight joint, otherwise the aluminum surface will oxidize again.
All types of three-phase asynchronous standard mo-
tors can be connected to the adjustable frequency
drive. Normally, small motors are star-connected
(230/400 V, D/Y). Large motors are delta-connected
(400/690 V, D/Y). Refer to the motor nameplate for
correct connection mode and voltage.

Figure 4. 22: Terminals for motor connection

NOTE
In motors without phase insulation paper or other insulation reinforcement suitable for operation with the voltage supply
(such as an adjustable frequency drive), fit a sine-wave filter on the output of the adjustable frequency drive. (Motors
that comply with IEC 60034-17 do not require a sine-wave filter) failure to do so could result in equipment damage..

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-19

Electrical Installation

No. 96 97 98 Motor voltage 0–100% of AC line voltage.

U V W 3 cables out of motor
U1 V1 W1
6 cables out of motor, Delta-connected
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1 6 cables out of motor, Star-connected
U2, V2, W2 to be interconnected separately
(optional terminal block)
No. 99 Ground connection
PE

Table 4. 7: 3 and 6 cable motor connection.

Motor Connection for A2 and A3

Follow these drawings step-by-step for connecting the motor to the adjustable frequency drive.

Figure 4. 23: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the plug and tighten them.

4-20 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Figure 4. 24: Mount cable clamp to ensure 360 degree connection between chassis and shield; ensure that the outer
insulation of the motor cable is removed under the clamp.

Motor Connection for A5

Figure 4. 25: First, terminate the motor ground, then insert the motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten
them. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-21

Electrical Installation

Motor Connection for B1 and B2

Figure 4. 26: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them.
Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp.

Motor connection for B3 and B4

Figure 4. 27: First terminate the motor ground, then Figure 4. 28: First terminate the motor ground, then
place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and
tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation tighten them. Please ensure that the outer insulation
of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp. of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp.

4-22 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Motor Connection for C1 and C2

Figure 4. 29: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires in the terminal and tighten them.
Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp.

Motor connection for C3 and C4

Figure 4. 30: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires into the appropriate terminals
and tighten. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-23

Electrical Installation

Figure 4. 31: First terminate the motor ground, then place motor U, V and W wires into the appropriate terminals
and tighten. Please ensure that the outer insulation of the motor cable is removed under the EMC clamp.

4-24 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Enclosure: B1 B2 C1 C2
A2 A3 A5 B3 B4 C3 C4
(IP 21/IP 55/ (IP 21/IP 55/ (IP 21/IP (IP 21/IP
(IP 20/IP 21) (IP 20/IP 21) (IP 55/IP 66) (IP 20) (IP 20) (IP 20) (IP20)
IP 66) IP 66) 55/66) 55/66)

TR200 Instruction Manual

Motor size:
1.1–3.0 3.7 1.1–3.7 5.5–11 15 5.5–11 15–18.5 18.5–30 37–45 22–30 37–45
200–240 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
1.1–4.0 5.5–7.5 1.1–7.5 11–18.5 22–30 11–18.5 22–37 37–55 75–90 45–55 75–90
380–480 V
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
1.1–7.5 11–18.5 22–30 11–18.5 22–37 37–55 75–90 45–55 75–90
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
Goto:

Table 4. 8: Motor wiring table.

Electrical Installation

4-25
Electrical Installation

Wiring Example and Testing

The following section describes how to terminate and access control wires. For an explanation of the function,
programming and wiring of the control terminals, please see chapter How to program the adjustable frequency
drive.

DC bus connection
The DC bus terminal is used for DC backup, with the intermediate circuit being supplied from an external source.

Terminal numbers used: 88, 89

Figure 4. 32: DC bus connections for enclosure B3. Figure 4. 33: DC bus connections for enclosure B4.

Figure 4. 34: DC bus connections for enclosure C3. Figure 4. 35: DC bus connections for enclosure C4.

Please contact Trane if you require further information.

4-26 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Relay connection
To set relay output, see par. group 5-4* Relays.
No. 01 - 02 make (normally open)
01 - 03 break (normally closed)
04 - 05 make (normally open)
04 - 06 break (normally closed)

Terminals for relay connection Terminals for relay connection

(A2 and A3 enclosures). (A5, B1 and B2 enclosures).

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-27

Electrical Installation

Figure 4. 40: Terminals for relay connection (C1 and C2 enclosures).

The relay connections are shown in the cut-out with relay plugs (from the accessory bag) fitted.

Figure 4. 41: Terminals for relay connections for B3. Only one relay input is fitted from the factory. When the second
relay is needed, remove the knock-out.

4-28 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Figure 4. 42: Terminals for relay connections for B4.

Figure 4. 43: Terminals for relay connections for C3 and C4. Located in the upper right corner of the adjustable
frequency drive.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-29

Electrical Installation

Relay output
Relay 1 Relay 2

• Terminal 01: common • Terminal 04: common

• Terminal 02: normal open 240 V AC • Terminal 05: normal open 400 V AC
• Terminal 03: normal closed 240 V AC • Terminal 06: normal closed 240 V AC
Relay 1 and relay 2 are programmed in par.5-40 Func-
tion Relay, par.5-41 On Delay, Relay, and par.5-42 Off
Delay, Relay.

Additional relay outputs by using option module

MCB 105.

4-30 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Access to Control Terminals

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects
before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures
to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Fail-
ure to disconnect power before servicing could result in
death or serious injury.

All terminals to the control cables are located under-

neath the terminal cover on the front of the adjustable
frequency drive. Remove the terminal cover with a
screwdriver. 130BT248

Figure 4. 44: Access to control terminals for A2, A3,

B3, B4, C3 and C4 enclosures

Remove front cover to access control terminals. When

replacing the front cover, ensure proper fastening by
applying a torque of 2 Nm.

Figure 4. 45: Access to control terminals for A5, B1,

B2, C1 and C2 enclosures

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-31

Electrical Installation

Control terminals
Drawing reference numbers:
1. 10-pole plug digital I/O.
2. 3-pole plug RS-485 bus.
3. 6-pole analog I/O.
4. USB connection.

Figure 4. 46: Control terminals (all enclosures)

How to Test Motor and Direction of Rotation

WARNING
Unintended motor start could occur. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadver-
tently energized. Stay away from rotating components to avoid being injured. Failure to follow recommendations could
result in death or serious injury.

Please follow these steps to test the motor connec-

tion and direction of rotation. Start with no power to
the unit.

Figure 4. 47:
Step 1: First, remove the insulation on both ends of a
1.97–2.76 in. [50–70 mm] piece of wire.

Figure 4. 49:
Step 3: Insert the other end in terminal 12 or 13.

Figure 4. 48:
Step 2: Insert one end in terminal 27 using a suitable
terminal screwdriver.

4-32 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

OK

OK

Figure 4. 51:
Step 5: After pressing the [Hand on] button, the LED
above the button should be lit and the motor may ro-
Figure 4. 50: tate.
Step 4: Power up the unit and press the [Off] button.
In this state, the motor should not rotate. Press [Off]
to stop the motor at any time. Note that the LED on
the [OFF] button should be lit. If alarms or warnings
are flashing, please see chapter 7 for more informa-
tion.

OK OK

Figure 4. 52: Figure 4. 53:

Step 6: The speed of the motor can be seen in the Step 7: To move the cursor, use the left ◄ and right
keypad. It can be adjusted by pushing the up ▲ and ► arrow buttons. This enables speed changes by larger
increments.
down ▼ arrow buttons.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-33

Electrical Installation

OK

Figure 4. 54:
Step 8: Press the [Off] button to stop the motor again.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures
to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before servicing could result in
death or serious injury.

Figure 4. 55:
Step 9: Change two motor wires if the desired rotation of direction is not achieved.

4-34 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Switches S201, S202, and S801

Switches S201 (Al 53) and S202 (Al 54) are used to
select a current (0-20 mA) or a voltage (0 to 10 V) con-
figuration of the analog input terminals 53 and 54 re-
spectively.

Switch S801 (BUS TER.) can be used to enable termi-

nation on the RS-485 port (terminals 68 and 69).

Please note that the switches may be covered by an

option, if so equipped.

Default setting:
S201 (AI 53) = OFF (voltage input)
S202 (AI 54) = OFF (voltage input)
S801 (Bus termination) = OFF

130BT310.10

Figure 4. 56: Switches location.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-35

Electrical Installation

Final Optimization and Test

To optimize motor shaft performance and optimize the adjustable frequency drive for the connected motor and
installation, please follow these steps. Ensure that the adjustable frequency drive and motor are connected and
that power is applied to the adjustable frequency drive.

NOTE: Before power-up, ensure that connected equipment is ready for use.

Step 1: Locate motor nameplate

NOTE: The motor is either star- (Y) or delta-connected

(Δ). This information is located on the motor name-
plate data.

Figure 4. 57: Motor nameplate example

Step 2: Enter the motor nameplate data in the follow-

1. Par.1-20 Motor Power [kW]
ing parameter list.
Par.1-21 Motor Power [HP]
To access the list, first press [QUICK MENU] key, then
2. Par.1-22 Motor Voltage
select “Q2 Quick Set-up”.
3. Par.1-23 Motor Frequency
4. Par.1-24 Motor Current
5. Par.1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

Table 4. 9: Motor related parameters

4-36 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Electrical Installation

Step 3: Activate Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)Activate Auto Tune

Performing AMA ensures best possible performance. AMA automatically takes measurements from the specific
motor connected and compensates for installation variances.

1. Connect terminal 27 to terminal 12 or use [QUICK MENU] and "Q2 Quick Set-up" and set Terminal 27 par.
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input to No function [0]
2. Press [QUICK MENU], select "Q3 Function Set-ups", select "Q3-1 General Settings", select "Q3-10 Adv. Motor
Settings" and scroll down to par.1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) Automatic Motor Adaption.
3. Press [OK] to activate the AMA par.1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).
4. Choose between complete or reduced AMA. If sine-wave filter is mounted, run only reduced AMA, or re-
move sine-wave filter during AMA procedure.
5. Press [OK] key. Display should show “Press [Hand on] to start”.
6. Press [Hand on] key. A progress bar indicates if AMA is in progress.
Stop the AMA during operation
1. Press the [OFF] key - the adjustable frequency drive enters into alarm mode and the display shows that the
AMA was terminated by the user.

Successful AMA
1. The display shows “Press [OK] to finish AMA”.
2. Press the [OK] key to exit the AMA state.

Unsuccessful AMA
1. The adjustable frequency drive enters into alarm mode. A description of the alarm can be found in the
Troubleshooting section.
2. "Report Value" in the [Alarm Log] shows the last measuring sequence carried out by the AMA before the
adjustable frequency drive entered alarm mode. This number, along with the description of the alarm, will
assist in troubleshooting. If contacting Trane Service, make sure to mention number and alarm description.

NOTE: Unsuccessful AMA is often caused by incorrectly entered motor nameplate data or too big difference
between the motor power size and the adjustable frequency drive power size.

Step 4: Set speed limit and ramp time

Par.3-02 Minimum Reference

Par.3-03 Maximum Reference

Par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par.4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

Par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or par.4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

Par.3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time Ramp-up Time 1 [s]

Par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time Ramp-down Time 1 [s]

See the section How to program the adjustable frequency drive, Quick Menu Mode for easy set-up of these
parameters.

TR200 Instruction Manual 4-37

Electrical Installation

4-38 TR200 Instruction Manual

How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency Drive
Two Ways of Operating
The adjustable frequency drive can be operated in two ways:
1. Graphical keypad, see 5.1.2
2. RS-485 serial communication or USB, both for PC connection, see 5.1.4
If the adjustable frequency drive is fitted with a serial communication bus option, please refer to relevant doc-
umentation.

How to operate the graphical keypad

The keypad is divided into four functional groups:

1. Graphical display with Status lines.

2. Menu keys and LEDs - selecting mode, changing parameters and switching between display functions.
3. Navigation keys and LEDs (LEDs).
4. Operation keys and LEDs.
Graphical display:
The LCD display is back lit with a total of 6 alpha-numeric lines. All data is displayed on the keypad which can
show up to five operating variables while in [Status] mode.

Display lines:
a. Status line: Status messages displaying icons and graphics.
b. Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data and variables defined or chosen by the user. By pressing the
[Status] key, up to one extra line can be added.
c. Status line: Status messages displaying text.

TR200 Instruction Manual 5-1

How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
The display is divided into 3 sections:

The top section (a) shows the status when in status mode or up to 2 variables when not in status mode and in
case of an alarm/warning.

The number of the Active Set-up (selected as the Active Set-up in par.0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When pro-
gramming in another set-up than the Active Set-up, the number of the set-up being programmed appears to the
right in brackets.

The Middle section (b) shows up to 5 variables with related unit, regardless of status. In the case of an alarm/
warning, the warning is shown instead of the variables.

The bottom section (c) always shows the state of the adjustable frequency drive in status mode.

It is possible to toggle between three status read-out displays by pressing the [Status] key.
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in each status screen - see below.

Several values or measurements can be linked to each of the displayed operating variables. The values / meas-
urements to be displayed can be defined via par.0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, par.0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
par.0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, par.0-23 Display Line 2 Large and par.0-24 Display Line 3 Large, which can be
accessed via [QUICK MENU], "Q3 Function Set-ups", "Q3-1 General Settings", "Q3-13 Display Settings".

Each value/measurement readout parameter selected in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to par.0-24 Display Line
3 Large has its own scale and number of digits after a possible decimal point. Larger numeric values are dis-
played with few digits after the decimal point.
Ex.: Current readout
5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A.

Status display I:

130BP041.10
This readout state is standard after start-up or initial-
ization.
Use [INFO] to obtain information about the value/ 1.1
measurement linked to the displayed operating vari-
ables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2, and 3).
See the operating variables shown in the display in 1.2
this figure. 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2
and 3 are shown in medium size.
2

3 1.3

5-2 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Status display II:
See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 2)
shown in the display in this figure.
In the example, Speed, Motor current, Motor power
and Frequency are selected as variables in the first
and second lines. 1.3
1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 are shown in small size. 2 is shown in
1.1
large size.
1.2
2

Status display III:

130BP063.10
This state displays the event and action of the Smart
Logic Control. For further information, see section
Smart Logic Control.

Display Contrast Adjustment

Press [status] and [▲] for darker display

Press [status] and [▼] for brighter display

Top section

Middle section

Bottom section

TR200 Instruction Manual 5-3

How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
LEDs:

If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear
on the control panel.
The On LED is activated when the adjustable frequency drive receives power from AC line voltage, a DC bus
terminal, or an external 24 V supply. At the same time, the back light is on.

• Green LED/On: Control section is working.

• Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.
• Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.

Keys

Menu keys
The menu keys are divided into functions. The keys
below the display and LEDs are used for parameter
set-up, including choice of display indication during
normal operation.

[Status]
indicates the status of the adjustable frequency drive and/or the motor. Three different readouts can be chosen
by pressing the [Status] key:
5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic Control.
Use [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for changing back to display mode from either the quick menu
mode, main menu mode or alarm mode. Also use the [Status] key to toggle single or double readout mode.

[Quick Menu]
allows quick set-up of the adjustable frequency drive. The most common TR200 functions can be programmed
here.

The [Quick Menu] consists of:

- My Personal Menu
- Quick Set-up
- Function Set-up
- Changes Made
- Loggings
The Function Set-up provides quick and easy access to all parameters required for the majority of TR200 appli-
cations including most VAV and CAV supply and return fans, cooling tower fans, primary, secondary and con-
denser water pumps and other pump, fan and compressor applications. Among other features, it also includes
parameters for selecting which variables to display on the keypad, digital preset speeds, scaling of analog ref-
erences, closed-loop single zone and multi-zone applications and specific functions related to fans, pumps and
compressors.

5-4 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
The Quick Menu parameters can be accessed immediately unless a password has been created via par.0-60 Main
Menu Password, par.0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password, par.0-65 Personal Menu Password or par.
0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password.
It is possible to switch directly between Quick Menu mode and Main Menu mode.

[Main Menu]
is used for programming all parameters. The Main Menu parameters can be accessed immediately unless a
password has been created via par.0-60 Main Menu Password, par.0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password,
par.0-65 Personal Menu Password or par.0-66 Access to Personal Menu w/o Password. For the majority of
TR200 applications, it is not necessary to access the Main Menu parameters but instead the Quick Menu, Quick
Set-up and Function Set-up provide the simplest and quickest access to parameters that are typically required.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode and Quick Menu mode.
Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter
shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.

[Alarm Log]
displays an Alarm list of the five latest alarms (numbered A1-A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm,
use the arrow keys to maneuver to the alarm number and press [OK]. Information is displayed about the con-
dition of the adjustable frequency drive before it enters alarm mode.

The alarm log button on the keypad allows access to both alarm log and maintenance log.

[Back]
reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation structure.

[Cancel]
last change or command will be cancelled as long as the display has not been changed.

[Info]
displays information about a command, parameter, or function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
information when needed.
Exit Info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel].

Navigation Keys
The four navigation arrows are used to navigate be-
tween the different choices available in [Quick
Menu], [Main Menu] and [Alarm Log]. Use the keys
to move the cursor.

[OK] is used for choosing a parameter marked by the

cursor and for enabling the change of a parameter.

TR200 Instruction Manual 5-5

How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Operation Keys for local control are found at the bot-
tom of the control panel.

[Hand On]
enables control of the adjustable frequency drive via the GLCP. [Hand On] also starts the motor, and it is now
possible to enter the motor speed data by means of the arrow keys. The key can be selected as Enable [1] or
Disable [0] via par.0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP.
The following control signals will still be active when [Hand On] is activated:
• [Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto on]
• Reset
• Coasting stop inverse
• Reversing
• Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
• Stop command from serial communication
• Quick stop
• DC brake

NOTE: External stop signals activated by means of control signals or a serial bus will override a “start” command
via the keypad.

[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par.0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If
no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is inactive the motor can only be stopped by disconnecting
the line power supply.

[Auto on]
enables the adjustable frequency drive to be controlled via the control terminals and/or serial communication.
When a start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the bus, the adjustable frequency drive will start.
The key can be selected as Enable [1] or Disable [0] via par.0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.

NOTE: An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has higher priority than the control keys [Hand
on] – [Auto on].

[Reset]
is used for resetting the adjustable frequency drive after an alarm (trip). It can be selected as Enable [1] or
Disable [0] via par.0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.

The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter
shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.

5-6 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
RS-485 Bus Connection
One or more adjustable frequency drives can be con-
nected to a controller (or master) using the standard
RS-485 interface. Terminal 68 is connected to the P
signal (TX+, RX+), while terminal 69 is connected to
the N signal (TX-, RX-).

If more than one adjustable frequency drive is con-

nected to a master, use parallel connections.
Figure 5. 1: Connection example.

In order to avoid potential equalizing currents in the shield, ground the cable shield via terminal 61, which is
connected to the frame via an RC link.

Bus termination
The RS-485 bus must be terminated by a resistor network at both ends. If the drive is the first or the last device
in the RS-485 loop, set the switch S801 on the control card to ON.
For more information, see the paragraph Switches S201, S202, and S801.

How to connect a PC to the adjustable frequency drive

To control or program the adjustable frequency drive from a PC, install the PC-based Configuration Tool TDU.
The PC is connected via a standard (host/device) USB cable, or via the RS-485 interface as shown in the TR200
Design Guide, chapter How to Install > Installation of misc. connections.

NOTE: The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage ter-
minals. The USB connection is connected to protection ground on the adjustable frequency drive. Use only
isolated laptop for PC connection to the USB connector on the adjustable frequency drive.

Figure 5. 2: For control cable connections, see section on Control Terminals.

TR200 Instruction Manual 5-7

How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
PC software tools
PC-based Configuration Tool Trane Drive Utility (TDU)
All adjustable frequency drives are equipped with a serial communication port. Trane provides a PC tool for
communication between PC and adjustable frequency drive, PC-based Configuration Tool TDU. Please check
the section on Available Literature for detailed information on this tool.

TDU Set-up Software

TDU has been designed as an easy to use interactive tool for setting parameters in our adjustable frequency
drives. .
The TDU Set-up software will be useful for:
• Planning a communication network off-line. TDU contains a complete adjustable frequency drive data-
base
• Commissioning adjustable frequency drives on-line.
• Saving settings for all adjustable frequency drives.
• Replacing an adjustable frequency drive in a network.
• Simple and accurate documentation of adjustable frequency drive settings after commissioning.
• Expanding an existing network.
• Adjustable frequency drives developed in the future will be fully supported.

Save adjustable frequency drive settings:

1. Connect a PC to the unit via USB com port. (NOTE: Use a PC, which is isolated from the line power, in
conjunction with the USB port. Failure to do so may damage equipment.)
2. Open TDU Set-up Software
3. Choose “Read from drive”
4. Choose “Save as”
All parameters are now stored on the PC.

Load adjustable frequency drive settings:

1. Connect a PC to the adjustable frequency drive via the USB com port
2. Open TDU Set-up software
3. Choose “Open”– stored files will be shown.
4. Open the appropriate file
5. Choose “Write to drive”
All parameter settings are now transferred to the adjustable frequency drive.

A separate manual for TDU Set-up Software is available.

The TDU Set-up software modules

The following modules are included in the software package:

5-8 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
TDU Set-up Software
Setting parameters
Copy to and from adjustable frequency drives
Documentation and print-out of parameter settings incl. diagrams

Ext. user interface

Preventive Maintenance Schedule
Clock settings
Timed Action Programming
Smart Logic Controller Set-up

Ordering number:
Please order the CD containing TDU Set-up Software using code number 130B1000.

Tips and Tricks

* For the majority of HVAC applications, the Quick Menu, Quick Set-up and Function Set-up
provide the simplest and quickest access to all the typical parameters required.
* Whenever possible, performing an AMA will ensure best shaft performance
* The contrast of the display can be adjusted by pressing [Status] and [▲] for a darker display
or by pressing [Status] and [▼] for a brighter display
* Under [Quick Menu] and [Changes Made] all parameters that have been changed from the
factory settings are displayed
* Press and hold the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds to access any parameter.
* For service purposes, it is recommended to copy all parameters to the keypad, see par.
0-50 LCP Copy for further information.

Table 5. 1: Tips and tricks

Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings When Using keypad

Once the set-up of an adjustable frequency drive is complete, it is recommended to store (backup) the parameter
settings in the keypad or on a PC via TDU Set-up Software Tool.

WARNING
Stop the motor before performing any of these operations, otherwise unexpected operation can occur. Disconnect all
electric power, including remote disconnects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the
power cannot be inadvertently energized.
Failure to follow recommendations could result in death or serious injury..

Data storage in keypad:

1. Go to par.0-50 LCP Copy
2. Press the [OK] key
3. Select “All to keypad”
4. Press the [OK] key

TR200 Instruction Manual 5-9

How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
All parameter settings are now stored in the GLCP indicated by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press
[OK].

The GLCP can now be connected to another adjustable frequency drive and the parameter settings copied to
this adjustable frequency drive.

Data transfer from keypad to adjustable frequency drive:

1. Go to par.0-50 LCP Copy
2. Press the [OK] key
3. Select “All from keypad”
4. Press the [OK] key
The parameter settings stored in the GLCP are now transferred to the adjustable frequency drive indicated by
the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].

Initialization to Default Settings

There are two ways to initialize the adjustable frequency drive to default: Recommended initialization and man-
ual initialization.
Please be aware that they have different impacts according to the below description.

Recommended initialization (via par.14-22 Opera-

Par.14-22 Operation Mode initializes all except:
tion Mode)
Par.14-50 RFI 1
1. Select par.14-22 Operation Mode
Par.8-30 Protocol
2. Press [OK] Par.8-31 Address
3. Select “Initialization” Par.8-32 Baud Rate
Par.8-35 Minimum Response Delay
4. Press [OK]
Par.8-36 Max Response Delay
5. Disconnect the power from the unit and wait for Par.8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay
the display to turn off. Par.15-00 Operating Hours to par.15-05 Over
6. Reconnecting the power resets the adjustable Volts
frequency drive. Note that first start-up takes a Par.15-20 Historic Log: Event to par.15-22 Historic
few more seconds Log: Time
Par.15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to par.
7. Press [Reset] 15-32 Alarm Log: Time

NOTE: Parameters selected in par.0-25 My Personal Menu will remain present with the default factory setting.

5-10 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Manual initialization

NOTE: When carrying out manual initialization, serial communication, RFI filter settings and fault log settings
are reset.
Removes parameters selected in par.0-25 My Personal Menu.

1. Disconnect from the line power and wait until

This parameter initializes all except:
the display turns off.
Par.15-00 Operating Hours
2a. Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at the Par.15-03 Power-ups
same time while powering up the Graphical LCP Par.15-04 Over Temps
(GLCP) Par.15-05 Over Volts
3. Release the keys after 5 s
4. The adjustable frequency drive is now pro-
grammed according to default settings

TR200 Instruction Manual 5-11

How to Operate the Adjustable Frequency
Drive

5-12 TR200 Instruction Manual

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency Drive
How to Program
Quick Menu mode
Parameter data
The keypad provides access to all parameters listed under the quick menus. To set parameters using the [Quick
Menu] button - enter or change parameter data or settings in accordance with the following procedure:
1. Press Quick Menu button
2. Use the [▲] and [▼] buttons to find the parameter you want to change
3. Press [OK]
4. Use [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the correct parameter setting
5. Press [OK]
6. To move to a different digit within a parameter setting, use the [◀] and [▶] buttons
7. Highlighted area indicates digit selected for change
8. Press [Cancel] button to disregard change, or press [OK] to accept change and enter the new setting

Example of changing parameter data

Assume parameter 22-60 is set to [Off]. However, you want to monitor the fan belt condition - non-broken or
broken - according to the following procedure:

1. Press Quick Menu key

2. Choose Function Set-ups with the [▼] button
3. Press [OK]
4. Choose Application Settings with the [▼] button
5. Press [OK]
6. Press [OK] again for Fan Functions
7. Choose Broken Belt Function by pressing [OK]
8. With [▼] button, choose [2] Trip
The adjustable frequency drive will now trip if a broken fan belt is detected.

Select [My Personal Menu] to display personal parameters:

Select [My Personal Menu] to display only the parameters, which have been pre-selected and programmed as
personal parameters. For example, you may have pre-programmed personal parameters to be in My Personal
Menu during factory commissioning to make on-site commissioning/fine tuning simpler. These parameters are
selected in par.0-25 My Personal Menu. Up to 20 different parameters can be programmed in this menu.

Select [Changes Made] to get information about:

• The last 10 changes. Use the up/down navigation keys to scroll between the last 10 changed parameters.
• The changes made since default setting.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-1

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Select [Loggings]:
to get information about the display line readouts. The information is shown as graphs.
Only display parameters selected in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small and par.0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be
viewed. It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for later reference.
Quick Set-upQuick Set-up
Efficient Parameter Set-up for TR200 Applications:
The parameters can easily be set up for the vast majority of the TR200 applications only by using the [Quick Set-
up] option.
After pressing [Quick Menu], the different choices in the quick menu are listed. See also figure 6.1 below and
tables Q3-1 to Q3-4 in the following Function Set-ups section.

Example of using the Quick Set-up option:

Assume you want to set the ramp-down time to 100 seconds!
1. Select [Quick Setup]. The first par.0-01 Language in Quick Set-up appears
2. Press [▼] repeatedly until par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time appears with the default setting of 20 seconds
3. Press [OK]
4. Use the [◀] button to highlight the third digit before the comma
5. Change '0' to '1' by using the [▲] button
6. Use the [▶] button to highlight the digit '2'
7. Change '2' to '0' with the [▼] button
8. Press [OK]
The new ramp-down time is now set to 100 seconds.
It is recommended to do the set-up in the order listed.

NOTE: A complete description of the function is found in the parameter sections of this manual.

Figure 6. 1: Quick Menu view.

6-2 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
The Quick Set-up menu gives access to the 18 most important set-up parameters of the adjustable frequency
drive. After programming, the adjustable frequency drive will, in most cases, be ready for operation. The 18
Quick Set-up parameters are shown in the table below. A complete description of the function is given in the
parameter description sections of this manual.

Parameter [Units]
Par.0-01 Language
Par.1-20 Motor Power [kW] [kW]
Par.1-21 Motor Power [HP] [HP]
Par.1-22 Motor Voltage* [V]
Par.1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz]
Par.1-24 Motor Current [A]
Par.1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM]
Par.1-28 Motor Rotation Check [Hz]
Par.3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time [s]
Par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time [s]
Par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] [RPM]
Par.4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]* [Hz]
Par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] [RPM]
Par.4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]* [Hz]
Par.3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] [RPM]
Par.3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]* [Hz]
Par.5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
Par.5-40 Function Relay**

Table 6. 1: Quick Set-up parameters

*The display showing depends on choices made in par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit and par.0-03 Regional Settings.
The default settings of par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit and par.0-03 Regional Settings depend on which region of
the world the adjustable frequency drive is supplied to but can be re-programmed as required.
** Par.5-40 Function Relay, is an array, where one may choose between Relay1 [0] or Relay2 [1]. Standard setting
is Relay1 [0] with the default choice Alarm [9].
See the parameter description in the section Commonly Used Parameters.

For a detailed information about settings and programming, please see the TR200 Programming Guide

NOTE: If [No Operation] is selected in par.5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, no connection to +24 V on terminal 27
is necessary to enable start.
If [Coast Inverse] (factory default value) is selected in par.5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, a connection to +24 V
is necessary to enable start.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-3

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Quick Set-up parameters
Parameters for Quick Set-up
0-01 Language
Option: Function:
Defines the language to be used in the display.
The adjustable frequency drive can be delivered with 2 different lan-
guage packages. English and German are included in both packages.
English cannot be erased or manipulated.

[0] * English Part of Language packages 1 - 2

[1] Deutsch Part of Language packages 1 - 2

[2] Francais Part of Language package 1

[3] Dansk Part of Language package 1

[4] Spanish Part of Language package 1

[5] Italiano Part of Language package 1

[6] Svenska Part of Language package 1

[7] Nederlands Part of Language package 1

[10] Chinese Language package 2

[20] Suomi Part of Language package 1

[22] English US Part of Language package 1

[27] Greek Part of Language package 1

[28] Bras.port Part of Language package 1

[36] Slovenian Part of Language package 1

[39] Korean Part of Language package 2

[40] Japanese Part of Language package 2

[41] Turkish Part of Language package 1

[42] Trad.Chinese Part of Language package 2

[43] Bulgarian Part of Language package 1

[44] Srpski Part of Language package 1

[45] Romanian Part of Language package 1

[46] Magyar Part of Language package 1

[47] Czech Part of Language package 1

[48] Polski Part of Language package 1

[49] Russian Part of Language package 1

[50] Thai Part of Language package 2

[51] Bahasa Indonesia Part of Language package 2

6-4 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
1-20 Motor Power [kW]
Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the nominal motor power in kW according to the motor nameplate
tion de- data. The default value corresponds to the nominal rated output of the
pend- unit.
ent* This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running. Depend-
ing on the choices made in par.0-03 Regional Settings, either par.
1-20 Motor Power [kW] or par.1-21 Motor Power [HP] is made invisible.

1-21 Motor Power [HP]

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the nominal motor power in HP according to the motor nameplate
tion de- data. The default value corresponds to the nominal rated output of the
pend- unit.
ent* This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
Depending on the choices made in par.0-03 Regional Settings, either par.
1-20 Motor Power [kW] or par.1-21 Motor Power [HP] is made invisible.

1-22 Motor Voltage

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the nominal motor voltage according to the motor nameplate data.
tion de- The default value corresponds to the nominal rated output of the unit.
pend- This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
ent*

1-23 Motor Frequency

Range: Function:
Applica- [20 - 1000 Hz]
tion de-
pend-
ent*

NOTE: This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

1-24 Motor Current

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the nominal motor current value from the motor nameplate data.
tion de- This data is used for calculating motor torque, motor thermal protection,
pend- etc.
ent*

Note
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

Range: Function:
Applica- [100 - 60000 RPM] Enter the nominal motor speed value from the motor nameplate data.
tion de- This data is used for calculating automatic motor compensations.
pend-
ent*

Note
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-5

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
1-28 Motor Rotation Check
Option: Function:
Following installation and connection of the motor, this function allows
the correct motor rotation direction to be verified. Enabling this function
overrides any bus commands or digital inputs, except External Interlock.

[0] * OFF Motor Rotation Check is not active.

[1] Enabled Motor Rotation Check is enabled. Once enabled, display shows:
"Please Note! Motor may run in wrong direction".

Pressing [OK], [Back] or [Cancel] will dismiss the message and display a new message: “Press [Hand on] to start
the motor. Press [Cancel] to abort”. Pressing [Hand on] starts the motor at 5 Hz in forward direction and the
display shows: “Motor is running. Check if motor rotation direction is correct. Press [Off] to stop the motor”.
Pressing [Off] stops the motor and resets par.1-28 Motor Rotation Check. If motor rotation direction is incorrect,
two motor phase cables should be interchanged. IMPORTANT:

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Main power must be removed before disconnecting motor phase cables. Failure to follow recommendation could result
in death or serious injury.

3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the ramp-up time, i.e., the acceleration time from 0 RPM to par.
tion de- 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. Choose a ramp-up time such that the output
pend- current does not exceed the current limit in par.4-18 Current Limit during
ent* ramping. See ramp-down time in par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time.
tacc × nnorm par .1 − 25
par .3 − 41 = s
ref rpm

3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the ramp-down time, i.e., the deceleration time from par.1-25 Mo-
tion de- tor Nominal Speed to 0 RPM. Choose a ramp-down time such that no
pend- overvoltage arises in the inverter due to regenerative operation of the
ent* motor, and such that the generated current does not exceed the current
limit set in par.4-18 Current Limit. See ramp-up time in par.3-41 Ramp 1
Ramp-up Time.
tdec × nnorm par .1 − 25
par .3 − 42 = s
ref rpm

6-6 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. The Motor Speed Low Limit
tion de- can be set to correspond to the manufacturer’s recommended minimum
pend- motor speed. The Motor Speed Low Limit must not exceed the setting in
ent* par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].

4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. The motor speed low limit can
tion de- be set to correspond to the minimum output frequency of the motor
pend- shaft. The Speed Low Limit must not exceed the setting in par.4-14 Motor
ent* Speed High Limit [Hz].

4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the maximum limit for motor speed. The Motor Speed High Limit
tion de- can be set to correspond to the manufacturer’s maximum rated motor.
pend- The Motor Speed High Limit must exceed the setting in par.4-11 Motor
ent* Speed Low Limit [RPM]. Only par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or
par.4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] will be displayed, depending on
other parameters in the main menu, and depending on default settings
dependant on global location.

NOTE: Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the inverter switching frequency (par.14-01 Switching Fre-
quency).

NOTE: Any changes in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] will reset the value in par.4-53 Warning Speed
High to the same value as set in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].

4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the maximum limit for motor speed. The Motor Speed High Limit
tion de- can be set to correspond to the manufacturer’s recommended maximum
pend- of the motor shaft. The Motor Speed High Limit must exceed the in par.
ent* 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]. Only par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
[RPM] or par.4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] will be displayed, de-
pending on other parameters in the main menu, and depending on de-
fault settings dependant on global location.

NOTE: Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the inverter switching frequency (par.14-01 Switching Fre-
quency).

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-7

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]
Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG, which is a fixed output speed. The
tion de- adjustable frequency drive runs at this speed when the jog function is
pend- activated. The maximum limit is defined in par. .
ent* See also par.3-80 Jog Ramp Time.

3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] The jog speed is a fixed output speed at which the adjustable frequency
tion de- drive is running when the jog function is activated.
pend- See also par.3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
ent*
Applica- [Application dependant]
tion de-
pend-
ent*

6-8 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Function Set-ups
The Function set-up provides quick and easy access to all parameters required for the majority of TR200 appli-
cations including most VAV and CAV supply and return fans, cooling tower fans, primary, secondary and con-
denser water pumps and other pump, fan and compressor applications.

How to access Function set-up - example

130BT110.10

130BT113.10
Figure 6. 2: Step 1: Turn on the adjustable frequency Figure 6. 5: Step 4: Function set-ups choices appear.
drive (yellow LED lights) Choose Q3-1 General Settings. Press [OK].
130BT111.10

130BT114.10
Figure 6. 6: Step 5: Use the up/down navigation keys
Figure 6. 3: Step 2: Press the [Quick Menus] button to scroll down to i.e., Q3-11 Analog Outputs. Press
(Quick Menus choices appear). [OK].
130BT112.10

130BT115.10

Figure 6. 7: Step 6: Choose par. 6-50. Press [OK].

Figure 6. 4: Step 3: Use the up/down navigation keys
to scroll down to Function set-ups. Press [OK].

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-9

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive

130BT116.10
Figure 6. 8: Step 7: Use the up/down navigation keys
to select between the different choices. Press [OK].

Function Set-ups parameters

The Function Set-ups parameters are grouped in the following way:

Q3-1 General Settings

Q3-10 Adv. Motor Set- Q3-11 Analog Output Q3-12 Clock Settings Q3-13 Display Settings
tings
Par.1-90 Motor Thermal Par.6-50 Terminal 42 Out- Par.0-70 Set Date and Par.0-20 Display Line 1.1
Protection put Time Small
Par.1-93 Thermistor Par.6-51 Terminal 42 Out- Par.0-71 Date Format Par.0-21 Display Line 1.2
Source put Min Scale Small
Par.1-29 Automatic Mo- Par.6-52 Terminal 42 Out- Par.0-72 Time Format Par.0-22 Display Line 1.3
tor Adaptation (AMA) put Max Scale Small
Par.14-01 Switching Fre- Par.0-74 DST/Summer- Par.0-23 Display Line 2
quency time Large
Par.4-53 Warning Speed Par.0-76 DST/Summer- Par.0-24 Display Line 3
High time Start Large
Par.0-77 DST/Summer- Par.0-37 Display Text 1
time End
Par.0-38 Display Text 2
Par.0-39 Display Text 3

Q3-2 Open-loop Settings

Q3-20 Digital Reference Q3-21 Analog Reference
Par.3-02 Minimum Reference Par.3-02 Minimum Reference
Par.3-03 Maximum Reference Par.3-03 Maximum Reference
Par.3-10 Preset Reference Par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
Par.5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input Par.6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
Par.5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input Par.6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
Par.5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input Par.6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
Par.6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Par.6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

6-10 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Q3-3 Closed-loop Settings
Q3-30 Single Zone Int. Setpoint Q3-31 Single Zone Ext. Setpoint
Par.1-00 Configuration Mode Par.1-00 Configuration Mode
Par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit Par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit
Par.20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. Par.20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb.
Par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. Par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.
Par.6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current Par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
Par.6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value Par.6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
Par.6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value Par.6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
Par.6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant Par.6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
Par.6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero Par.6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Par.6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time Par.6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Par.6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
Par.20-21 Setpoint 1 Par.6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Par.20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control Par.6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Par.20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM] Par.6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
Par.20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz] Par.6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero
Par.20-93 PID Proportional Gain Par.6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
Par.20-94 PID Integral Time Par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Par.20-70 Closed-loop Type Par.20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
Par.20-71 Tuning Mode Par.20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]
Par.20-72 PID Output Change Par.20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]
Par.20-73 Minimum Feedback Level Par.20-93 PID Proportional Gain
Par.20-74 Maximum Feedback Level Par.20-94 PID Integral Time
Par.20-79 PID Auto Tuning Par.20-70 Closed-loop Type
Par.20-71 Tuning Mode
Par.20-72 PID Output Change
Par.20-73 Minimum Feedback Level
Par.20-74 Maximum Feedback Level
Par.20-79 PID Auto Tuning

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-11

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive

Q3-32 Multi Zone / Adv

Par.1-00 Configuration Mode
Par.3-15 Reference 1 Source
Par.3-16 Reference 2 Source
Par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source
Par.20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion
Par.20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit
Par.20-03 Feedback 2 Source
Par.20-04 Feedback 2 Conversion
Par.20-05 Feedback 2 Source Unit
Par.20-06 Feedback 3 Source
Par.20-07 Feedback 3 Conversion
Par.20-08 Feedback 3 Source Unit
Par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit
Par.20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb.
Par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.
Par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
Par.6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
Par.6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
Par.6-13 Terminal 53 High Current
Par.6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Par.6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Par.6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant
Par.6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero
Par.6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
Par.6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
Par.6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
Par.6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
Par.6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Par.6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Par.6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
Par.6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero
Par.6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
Par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Par.4-56 Warning Feedback Low
Par.4-57 Warning Feedback High
Par.20-20 Feedback Function
Par.20-21 Setpoint 1
Par.20-22 Setpoint 2
Par.20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control
Par.20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]
Par.20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]
Par.20-93 PID Proportional Gain
Par.20-94 PID Integral Time
Par.20-70 Closed-loop Type
Par.20-71 Tuning Mode
Par.20-72 PID Output Change
Par.20-73 Minimum Feedback Level
Par.20-74 Maximum Feedback Level
Par.20-79 PID Auto Tuning

6-12 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Q3-4 Application Settings
Q3-40 Fan Functions Q3-41 Pump Functions Q3-42 Compressor Functions
Par.22-60 Broken Belt Function Par.22-22 Low Speed Detection Par.1-03 Torque Characteristics
Par.22-61 Broken Belt Torque Par.22-23 No-Flow Function Par.1-71 Start Delay
Par.22-62 Broken Belt Delay Par.22-24 No-Flow Delay Par.22-75 Short Cycle Protection
Par.4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set- Par.22-40 Minimum Run Time Par.22-76 Interval between Starts
up
Par.1-03 Torque Characteristics Par.22-41 Minimum Sleep Time Par.22-77 Minimum Run Time
Par.22-22 Low Speed Detection Par.22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] Par.5-01 Terminal 27 Mode
Par.22-23 No-Flow Function Par.22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] Par.5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
Par.22-24 No-Flow Delay Par.22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Differ- Par.5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
ence
Par.22-40 Minimum Run Time Par.22-45 Setpoint Boost Par.5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
Par.22-41 Minimum Sleep Time Par.22-46 Maximum Boost Time Par.5-40 Function Relay
Par.22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] par.1-73 Flying Start
Par.22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] Par.1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]
Par.22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Differ- Par.1-03 Torque Characteristics Par.1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz]
ence
Par.22-45 Setpoint Boost Par.1-73 Flying Start
Par.22-46 Maximum Boost Time
Par.2-10 Brake Function
Par.2-16 AC Brake Max. Current
Par.2-17 Over-voltage Control
Par.1-73 Flying Start
Par.1-71 Start Delay
Par.1-80 Function at Stop
Par.2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current
Par.4-10 Motor Speed Direction

See also TR200 Programming Guide for a detailed description of the Function Set-ups parameter groups.

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Option: Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1, left position.

[0] * None No display value selected

[37] Display Text 1 Enables an individual text string to be written, for display in the keypad
or to be read via serial communication.

[38] Display Text 2 Enables an individual text string to be written, for display in the keypad
or to be read via serial communication.

[39] Display Text 3 Enables an individual text string to be written, for display in the keypad
or to be read via serial communication.

[89] Date and Time Readout Displays the current date and time.

[953] Profibus Warning Word Displays Profibus communication warnings.

[1005] Readout Transmit Error View the number of CAN control transmission errors since the last pow-
Counter er-up.

[1006] Readout Receive Error View the number of CAN control receipt errors since the last power-up.
Counter

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-13

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[1007] Readout Bus Off Counter View the number of Bus Off events since the last power-up.

[1013] Warning Parameter View a DeviceNet-specific warning word. One separate bit is assigned to
every warning.

[1115] LON Warning Word Shows the LON-specific warnings.

[1117] XIF Revision Shows the version of the external interface file of the Neuron C chip on
the LON option.

[1118] LonWorks Revision Shows the software version of the application program of the Neuron C
chip on the LON option.

[1501] Running Hours View the number of running hours of the motor.

[1502] Input kWh Counter View the line power consumption in kWh.

[1600] Control Word View the control word sent from the adjustable frequency drive via the
serial communication port in hex code.

[1601] Reference [Unit] Total reference (sum of digital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and

slow-down) in selected unit.

[1602] * Reference % Total reference (sum of digital/analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch up and

slow-down) in percent.

[1603] Status Word Present status word

[1605] Main Actual Value [%] View the two-byte word sent with the status word to the bus master re-
porting the main actual value.

[1609] Custom Readout View the user-defined readouts as defined in par.0-30 Custom Readout
Unit, par.0-31 Custom Readout Min Value and par.0-32 Custom Readout
Max Value.

[1610] Input Power [kW] Actual power consumed by the motor in kW.

[1611] Input Power [hp] Actual power consumed by the motor in HP.

[1612] Motor voltage Voltage supplied to the motor.

[1613] Frequency Motor frequency, i.e., the output frequency from the adjustable frequen-
cy drive in Hz.

[1614] Motor Current Phase current of the motor measured as effective value.

[1615] Frequency [%] Motor frequency, i.e., the output frequency from the adjustable frequen-
cy drive in percent.

[1616] Torque [Nm] Present motor load as a percentage of the rated motor torque.

[1617] Speed [RPM] Motor speed reference. Actual speed will depend on slip compensation
being used (compensation set in par.1-62 Slip Compensation). If not
used, actual speed will be the value read in the display minus motor slip.

[1618] Motor Thermal Thermal load on the motor, calculated by the ETR function. See also pa-
rameter group 1-9* Motor Temperature.

[1622] Torque [%] Shows the actual torque produced, in percentage.

[1630] DC Link Voltage Intermediate circuit voltage in the adjustable frequency drive.

[1632] Brake Energy /s Present braking energy transferred to an external brake resistor.

6-14 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Stated as an instantaneous value.

[1633] Brake Energy /2 min Braking energy transferred to an external brake resistor. The mean pow-
er is calculated continuously for the most recent 120 seconds.

[1634] Heatsink Temp. Present heatsink temperature of the adjustable frequency drive. The cut-
out limit is 203° ± 9°F [95° ± 5°C]; cutting back in occurs at 158° ± 9°F [70°
± 5°C].

[1635] Inverter Thermal Percentage load of the inverters

[1636] Inv. Nom. Current Nominal current of the adjustable frequency drive.

[1637] Inv. Max. Current Maximum current of the adjustable frequency drive.

[1638] SL Controller State State of the event executed by the control

[1639] Control Card Temp. Temperature of the control card.

[1643] Timed Actions Status

[1650] External Reference Sum of the external reference as a percentage, i.e., the sum of analog/
pulse/bus.

[1652] Feedback [Unit] Reference value from programmed digital input(s).

[1653] Digi Pot Reference View the contribution of the digital potentiometer to the actual reference
Feedback.

[1654] Feedback 1 [Unit] View the value of Feedback 1. See also par. 20-0*.

[1655] Feedback 2 [Unit] View the value of Feedback 2. See also par. 20-0*.

[1656] Feedback 3 [Unit] View the value of Feedback 3. See also par. 20-0*.

[1658] PID Output [%] Returns the Drive Closed Loop PID controller output value in percent.

[1660] Digital Input Displays the status of the digital inputs. Signal low = 0; Signal high = 1.
Regarding order, see par.16-60 Digital Input. Bit 0 is at the extreme right.

[1661] Terminal 53 Switch Set- Setting of input terminal 53. Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
ting
[1662] Analog Input 53 Actual value at input 53 either as a reference or protection value.

[1663] Terminal 54 Switch Set- Setting of input terminal 54. Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
ting
[1664] Analog Input 54 Actual value at input 54 either as reference or protection value.

[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA] Actual value at output 42 in mA. Use par.6-50 Terminal 42 Output to se-
lect the variable to be represented by output 42.

[1666] Digital Output [bin] Binary value of all digital outputs.

[1667] Pulse Input #29 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 29 as a pulse input.

[1668] Pulse Input #33 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency applied at terminal 33 as a pulse input.

[1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz] Actual value of pulses applied to terminal 27 in digital output mode.

[1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz] Actual value of pulses applied to terminal 29 in digital output mode.

[1671] Relay Output [bin] View the setting of all relays.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-15

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[1672] Counter A View the present value of Counter A.

[1673] Counter B View the present value of Counter B.

[1675] Analog In X30/11 Actual value of the signal on input X30/11 (General Purpose I/O Card.
Option)

[1676] Analog In X30/12 Actual value of the signal on input X30/12 (General Purpose I/O Card.
Optional)

[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA] Actual value at output X30/8 (General Purpose I/O Card. Optional) Use
par.6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output to select the variable to be shown.

[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from the bus master.

[1682] Fieldbus REF 1 Main reference value sent with control word via the serial communica-
tions network, e.g., from the BMS, PLC or other master controller.

[1684] Comm. Option Status Extended serial communication option status word.

[1685] FC Port CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from the bus master.

[1686] FC Port REF 1 Status word (STW) sent to the bus master.

[1690] Alarm Word One or more alarms in a Hex code (used for serial communications)

[1691] Alarm word 2 One or more alarms in a Hex code (used for serial communications)

[1692] Warning Word One or more warnings in a Hex code (used for serial communications)

[1693] Warning word 2 One or more warnings in a Hex code (used for serial communications)

[1694] Ext. Status Word One or more status conditions in a Hex code (used for serial communi-
cations)

[1695] Ext. Status Word 2 One or more status conditions in a Hex code (used for serial communi-
cations)

[1696] Maintenance Word The bits reflect the status for the programmed preventive maintenance
events in parameter group 23-1*

[1840] Analog Input X49/1

[1841] Analog Input X49/3
[1842] Analog Input X49/5
[1843] Analog Output X49/7
[1844] Analog Output X49/9
[1845] Analog Output X49/11
[1846] X49 Digital Output [bin]
[2117] Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] The value of the reference for extended Closed-loop Controller 1

[2118] Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 1

[2119] Ext. 1 Output [%] The value of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 1

[2137] Ext. 2 Reference [Unit] The value of the reference for extended Closed-loop Controller 2

[2138] Ext. 2 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 2

[2139] Ext. 2 Output [%] The value of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 2

[2157] Ext. 3 Reference [Unit] The value of the reference for extended Closed-loop Controller 3

6-16 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[2158] Ext. 3 Feedback [Unit] The value of the feedback signal for extended Closed-loop Controller 3

[2159] Ext. 3 Output [%] The value of the output from extended Closed-loop Controller 3

[2316] Maintenance Text

[3110] Bypass Status Word
[3111] Bypass Running Hours
[9913] Idle time
[9914] Paramdb requests in
queue
[9920] HS Temp. (PC1)
[9921] HS Temp. (PC2)
[9922] HS Temp. (PC3)
[9923] HS Temp. (PC4)
[9924] HS Temp. (PC5)
[9925] HS Temp. (PC6)
[9926] HS Temp. (PC7)
[9927] HS Temp. (PC8)

Note
Please consult the TR200 Programming Guide for detailed information.

0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small

Select a variable for display in line 1, middle position.
Option: Function:
[1614] * Motor Current The options are the same as those listed in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small.

0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small

Select a variable for display in line 1, right position.
Option: Function:
[1610] * Power [kW] The options are the same as those listed in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small.

0-23 Display Line 2 Large

Select a variable for display in line 2.
Option: Function:
[1613] * Frequency The options are the same as those listed in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small.

0-24 Display Line 3 Large

Select a variable for display in line 3.
Option: Function:
[1502] * kWh Counter The options are the same as those listed in par.0-20 Display Line 1.1
Small.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-17

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
0-37 Display Text 1
Range: Function:
Applica- [0 - 0 ]
tion de-
pend-
ent*

0-38 Display Text 2

Range: Function:
Applica- [0 - 0 ]
tion de-
pend-
ent*

0-39 Display Text 3

Range: Function:
Applica- [0 - 0 ]
tion de-
pend-
ent*

0-70 Set Date and Time

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Sets the date and time of the internal clock. The format to be used is set
tion de- in par.0-71 Date Format and par.0-72 Time Format.
pend-
ent*

0-71 Date Format

Option: Function:
Sets the date format to be used in the keypad.

[0] * YYYY-MM-DD
[1] * DD-MM-YYYY
[2] MM/DD/YYYY

0-72 Time Format

Option: Function:
Sets the time format to be used in the keypad.

[0] * 24 h
[1] 12 h

0-74 DST/Summertime
Option: Function:
Choose how Daylight Saving Time/Summertime should be handled. For
manual DST/Summertime enter the start date and end date in par.
0-76 DST/Summertime Start and par.0-77 DST/Summertime End.

[0] * OFF
[2] Manual

6-18 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
0-76 DST/Summertime Start
Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Sets the date and time when summertime/DST starts. The date is pro-
tion de- grammed in the format selected in par.0-71 Date Format.
pend-
ent*

0-77 DST/Summertime End

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Sets the date and time when summertime/DST ends. The date is pro-
tion de- grammed in the format selected in par.0-71 Date Format.
pend-
ent*

1-00 Configuration Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Open-loop Motor speed is determined by applying a speed reference or by setting
desired speed when in Hand Mode.
Open-loop is also used if the adjustable frequency drive is part of a
closed-loop control system based on an external PID controller providing
a speed reference signal as output.

[3] Closed-loop Motor speed will be determined by a reference from the built-in PID con-
troller varying the motor speed as part of a closed-loop control process
(e.g., constant pressure or flow). The PID controller must be configured
in par. 20-** or via the function set-ups accessed by pressing the [Quick
Menu] button.

NOTE: This parameter cannot be changed when motor is running.

NOTE: When set for Closed-loop, the commands Reversing and Start Reversing will not reverse the direction of
the motor.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-19

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
1-03 Torque Characteristics
Option: Function:
[0] * Compressor torque Compressor [0]: For speed control of screw and scroll compressors. Pro-
vides a voltage which is optimized for a constant torque load character-
istic of the motor in the entire range down to 10 Hz.

[1] Variable torque Variable Torque [1]: For speed control of centrifugal pumps and fans.
Also to be used when controlling more than one motor from the same
adjustable frequency drive (e.g., multiple condenser fans or cooling tow-
er fans). Provides a voltage which is optimized for a squared torque load
characteristic of the motor.

[2] Auto Energy Optim. CT Auto Energy Optimization Compressor [2]: For optimum energy efficient
speed control of screw and scroll compressors. Provides a voltage which
is optimized for a constant torque load characteristic of the motor in the
entire range down to 15Hz but in addition the AEO feature will adapt the
voltage exactly to the current load situation, thereby reducing energy
consumption and audible noise from the motor. To obtain optimal per-
formance, the motor power factor cos phi must be set correctly. This
value is set in par.14-43 Motor Cos-Phi. The parameter has a default value
which is automatically adjusted when the motor data is programmed.
These settings will typically ensure optimum motor voltage but if the
motor power factor cos phi requires tuning, an AMA function can be
carried out using par.1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA). It is very
rarely necessary to adjust the motor power factor parameter manually.

[3] * Auto Energy Optim. VT Auto Energy Optimization VT [3]: For optimum energy efficient speed
control of centrifugal pumps and fans. Provides a voltage which is opti-
mized for a squared torque load characteristic of the motor but in addi-
tion the AEO feature will adapt the voltage exactly to the current load
situation, thereby reducing energy consumption and audible noise from
the motor. To obtain optimal performance, the motor power factor cos
phi must be set correctly. This value is set in par.14-43 Motor Cos-Phi.
The parameter has a default value and is automatically adjusted when
the motor data is programmed. These settings will typically ensure op-
timum motor voltage but if the motor power factor cos phi requires tun-
ing, an AMA function can be carried out using par.1-29 Automatic Motor
Adaptation (AMA). It is very rarely necessary to adjust the motor power
factor parameter manually.

6-20 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)
Option: Function:
The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor performance by automati-
cally optimizing the advanced motor parameters par.1-30 Stator Resist-
ance (Rs) to par.1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)) while the motor is stationary.

[0] * Off No function

[1] Enable complete AMA performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the rotor resistance Rr, the
stator leakage reactance X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2 and the main
reactance Xh.

[2] Enable reduced AMA Performs a reduced AMA of the stator resistance Rs in the system only.
Select this option if an LC filter is used between the adjustable frequency
drive and the motor.

Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand on] after selecting [1] or [2]. See also the item Automatic Motor
Adaptation in the Design Guide. After a normal sequence, the display will read: “Press [OK] to finish AMA”.
After pressing the [OK] key, the adjustable frequency drive is ready for operation.

NOTE:

• For the best adaptation of the adjustable frequency drive, run AMA on a cold motor
• AMA cannot be performed while the motor is running.
NOTE: It is important to set motor par. 1-2* Motor Data correctly, since these form part of the AMA algorithm.
An AMA must be performed to achieve optimum dynamic motor performance. It may take up to 10 min., de-
pending on the motor power rating.

NOTE: Avoid generating external torque during AMA.

NOTE: If one of the settings in par. 1-2* Motor Data is changed, par.1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to par.1-39 Motor
Poles, the advanced motor parameters will return to default setting.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

NOTE: Full AMA should be run without filter only while reduced AMA can be run with filter.

See section: Application Examples > Automatic Motor Adaptation in the Design Guide.

1-71 Start Delay

Range: Function:
0.0 s* [0.0 - 120.0 s] The function selected in par.1-80 Function at Stop is active in the delay
period.
Enter the time delay required before commencing acceleration.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-21

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
1-73 Flying Start
Option: Function:
This function makes it possible to catch a motor that is spinning freely
due to a line drop-out.
When par.1-73 Flying Start is enabled, par.1-71 Start Delay has no func-
tion.
Search direction for flying start is linked to the setting in par.4-10 Motor
Speed Direction.
Clockwise [0]: Flying start search in clockwise direction. If not successful,
a DC brake is carried out.
Both Directions [2]: The flying start will first make a search in the direction
determined by the last reference (direction). If unable to find the speed,
it will search in the other direction. If not successful, a DC brake will be
activated in the time set in par.2-02 DC Braking Time. Start will then take
place from 0 Hz.

[0] * Disabled Select Disable [0] if this function is not required

[1] Enabled Select Enable [1] to enable the adjustable frequency drive to “catch” and
control a spinning motor.

1-80 Function at Stop

Option: Function:
Select the adjustable frequency drive function after a stop command or
after the speed is ramped down to the settings in par.1-81 Min Speed for
Function at Stop [RPM].

[0] * Coast Leaves motor in free mode.

[1] DC Hold/Motor Preheat Energizes motor with a DC holding current (see par.2-00 DC Hold/Preheat
Current).

1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM]

Range: Function:
0 RPM* [Application dependant] Set the desired motor speed for trip limit. If the trip speed is set to 0, the
function is not active. If the speed after the start (or during a stop) falls
below the value in the parameter at any time, the drive will trip with an
alarm [A49] Speed Limit. Function at stop.

NOTE: This parameter is only available if par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set to [RPM].

1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz]

Range: Function:
0.0 Hz* [Application dependant] If the trip speed is set to 0, the function is not active.
If the speed after the start (or during a stop) falls below the value in the
parameter at any time, the drive will trip with an alarm [A49] Speed Limit.
Function at stop.

0.0 Hz* [Application dependant]

NOTE: This parameter is only available if par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit is set to [Hz].

6-22 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
Option: Function:
The adjustable frequency drive determines the motor temperature for
motor protection in two different ways:
• Via a thermistor sensor connected to one of the analog or digital
inputs (par.1-93 Thermistor Source).
• Via calculation (ETR = Electronic Thermal Relay) of the thermal
load, based on the actual load and time. The calculated ther-
mal load is compared with the rated motor current IM,N and
the rated motor frequency fM,N. The calculations estimate the
need for a lower load at lower speed due to less cooling from
the fan incorporated in the motor.

[0] * No protection If the motor is continuously overloaded and no warning or trip of ad-
justable frequency drive is wanted.

[1] Thermistor warning Activates a warning when the connected thermistor in the motor reacts
in the event of motor overtemperature.

[2] Thermistor trip Stops (trips) the adjustable frequency drive when the connected ther-
mistor in the motor reacts in the event of motor overtemperature.

[3] ETR warning 1

[4] * ETR trip 1
[5] ETR warning 2
[6] ETR trip 2
[7] ETR warning 3
[8] ETR trip 3
[9] ETR warning 4
[10] ETR trip 4

ETR (Electronic Thermal Relay) functions 1-4 will calculate the load when the set-up where they were selected
is active. For example, ETR-3 starts calculating when Set-up 3 is selected. For the North American market: The
ETR functions provide class 20 motor overload protection in accordance with NEC.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-23

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive

WARNING
In order to maintain PELV, all connections made to the control terminals must be PELV, e.g., thermistor must be
reinforced/ double-insulated.

NOTE: Trane recommends using 24 VDC as thermistor supply voltage.

1-93 Thermistor Source

Option: Function:
Select the input to which the thermistor (PTC sensor) should be connec-
ted. An analog input option [1] or [2] cannot be selected if the analog
input is already in use as a reference source (selected in par.3-15 Refer-
ence 1 Source, par.3-16 Reference 2 Source or ).
When using MCB112, choice [0] None must always be selected.

[0] * None
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[3] Digital input 18
[4] Digital input 19
[5] Digital input 32
[6] Digital input 33

NOTE: This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current

Range: Function:
50 %* [Application dependant] Enter a value for holding current as a percentage of the rated motor cur-
rent IM,N set in par.1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC holding current corre-
sponds to IM,N.
This parameter holds the motor (holding torque) or pre-heats the motor.
This parameter is active if [1] DC hold/Preheat is selected in par.
1-80 Function at Stop.

Note
The maximum value depends on the rated motor current.
Avoid 100% current for too long. It may damage the motor.

2-10 Brake Function

Option: Function:
[0] * Off No brake resistor installed.

[1] Resistor brake Brake resistor incorporated in the system, for dissipation of surplus brak-
ing energy as heat. Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC link
voltage during braking (generating operation). The resistor brake func-
tion is only active in adjustable frequency drives with an integral dynamic
brake.

[2] AC brake AC Brake will only work in Compressor Torque mode in par.1-03 Torque
Characteristics.

6-24 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
2-16 AC Brake Max. Current
Range: Function:
100.0 [Application dependant]
%*

2-17 Over-voltage Control

Option: Function:
Over-voltage control (OVC) reduces the risk of the adjustable frequency
drive tripping due to overvoltage on the DC link caused by generative
power from the load.

[0] Disabled No OVC required.

[2] * Enabled Activates OVC.

NOTE: The ramp time is automatically adjusted to avoid tripping of the adjustable frequency drive.

3-02 Minimum Reference

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the Minimum Reference. The Minimum Reference is the lowest
tion de- value obtainable by adding all references together. The Minimum Ref-
pend- erence value and unit matches the configuration choice made in par.
ent* 1-00 Configuration Mode and par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit, re-
spectively.
NOTE: This parameter is used in open-loop only.

3-03 Maximum Reference

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the maximum acceptable value for the remote reference. The Max-
tion de- imum Reference value and unit matches the configuration choice made
pend- in par.1-00 Configuration Mode and par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit,
ent* respectively.
NOTE: If operating with par.1-00 Configuration Mode set for Closed-loop
[3], par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. must be used.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-25

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
3-10 Preset Reference
Array [8]

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [-100.00 - 100.00 %]

3-15 Reference 1 Source

Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used for the first reference signal. Par.
3-15 Reference 1 Source, par.3-16 Reference 2 Source and par.3-17 Ref-
erence 3 Source define up to three different reference signals. The sum
of these reference signals defines the actual reference.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

[0] No function
[1] * Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input X30/11
[22] Analog input X30/12
[23] Analog Input X42/1
[24] Analog Input X42/3
[25] Analog Input X42/5
[26] Analog Input X49/1
[27] Analog Input X49/3
[28] Analog Input X49/5
[30] Ext. Closed-loop 1
[31] Ext. Closed-loop 2
[32] Ext. Closed-loop 3

6-26 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
3-16 Reference 2 Source
Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used for the second reference signal.
par.3-15 Reference 1 Source, par.3-16 Reference 2 Source and par.
3-17 Reference 3 Source define up to three different reference signals.
The sum of these reference signals defines the actual reference.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

[0] No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[7] Pulse input 29
[8] Pulse input 33
[20] * Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input X30/11
[22] Analog input X30/12
[23] Analog Input X42/1
[24] Analog Input X42/3
[25] Analog Input X42/5
[26] Analog Input X49/1
[27] Analog Input X49/3
[28] Analog Input X49/5
[30] Ext. Closed-loop 1
[31] Ext. Closed-loop 2
[32] Ext. Closed-loop 3

4-10 Motor Speed Direction

Option: Function:
Selects the motor speed direction required.
Use this parameter to prevent unwanted reversing.

[0] Clockwise Only operation in a clockwise direction will be allowed.

[2] * Both directions Operation in both a clockwise and anti-clockwise direction will be al-
lowed.

NOTE: The setting in par.4-10 Motor Speed Direction has impact on the Flying Start in par.1-73 Flying Start.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-27

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
4-53 Warning Speed High
Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor speed exceeds this limit
tion de- (nHIGH), the display reads SPEED HIGH. The signal outputs can be pro-
pend- grammed to produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay
ent* output 01 or 02. Program the upper signal limit of the motor speed,
nHIGH, within the normal working range of the adjustable frequency
drive. Refer to the drawing in this section.

NOTE: Any changes in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] will reset the value in par.4-53 Warning Speed
High to the same value as set in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
If a different value is needed in par.4-53 Warning Speed High, it must be set after programming of par.4-13 Motor
Speed High Limit [RPM]!

4-56 Warning Feedback Low

Range: Function:
-999999. [Application dependant] Enter the lower feedback limit. When the feedback falls below this limit,
999 the display reads Feedb Low. The signal outputs can be programmed to
Proc- produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output 01 or
essCtrlU- 02.
nit*

4-57 Warning Feedback High

Range: Function:
999999. [Application dependant] Enter the upper feedback limit. When the feedback exceeds this limit, the
999 display reads Feedb High. The signal outputs can be programmed to
Proc- produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output 01 or
essCtrlU- 02.
nit*

4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up

Option: Function:
[0] * OFF No function

[1] Enabled Starts the semi-automatic bypass set-up and continue with the proce-
dure described above.

5-01 Terminal 27 Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.

[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.

Please note that this parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

5-02 Terminal 29 Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Input Defines terminal 29 as a digital input.

[1] Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.

This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

6-28 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
5-1* Digital Inputs
Parameters for configuring the input functions for the input terminals.
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions in the adjustable frequency drive. All digital inputs
can be set to the following functions:

Digital input function Select Terminal

No operation [0] All *terminal 19, 32, 33
Reset [1] All
Coast inverse [2] 27
Coast and reset inverse [3] All
DC brake inverse [5] All
Stop inverse [6] All
External interlock [7] All
Start [8] All *terminal 18
Latched start [9] All
Reversing [10] All
Start reversing [11] All
Jog [14] All *terminal 29
Preset reference on [15] All
Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
Preset ref bit 1 [17] All
Preset ref bit 2 [18] All
Freeze reference [19] All
Freeze output [20] All
Speed up [21] All
Slow [22] All
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
Pulse input [32] terminal 29, 33
Ramp bit 0 [34] All
Mains failure inverse [36] All
Fire mode [37] All
Run Permissive [52] All
Hand start [53] All
Auto-start [54] All
DigiPot Increase [55] All
DigiPot Decrease [56] All
DigiPot Clear [57] All
Counter A (up) [60] 29, 33
Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
Reset Counter A [62] All
Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33
Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33
Reset Counter B [65] All
Sleep Mode [66] All
Reset Maintenance Word [78] All
Lead Pump Start [120] All
Lead Pump Alternation [121] All
Pump 1 Interlock [130] All
Pump 2 Interlock [131] All
Pump 3 Interlock [132] All

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-29

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Digital Inputs, 5-1* continued
All = Terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33, X30/2, X30/3, X30/4. X30/ are the terminals on MCB 101.

Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in the associated parameter.

All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions:

[0] No operation No reaction to signals transmitted to terminal.

[1] Reset Resets adjustable frequency drive after a TRIP/ALARM. Not all alarms
can be reset.
[2] Coast inverse Leaves motor in free mode. Logic ‘0’ => coasting stop.
(Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop, inverted input (NC).
[3] Coast and reset inverse Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC).
Leaves motor in free mode and resets the adjustable frequency drive.
Logic ‘0’ => coasting stop and reset.
[5] DC brake inverse Inverted input for DC braking (NC).
Stops motor by energizing it with a DC current for a certain time period.
See par.2-01 DC Brake Current to par.2-03 DC Brake Cut-in Speed
[RPM]. The function is only active when the value in par.2-02 DC Braking
Time is different from 0. Logic ’0’ => DC braking.
[6] Stop inverse Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop function when the selected ter-
minal goes from logical level ‘1’ to ‘0’. The stop is performed according
to the selected ramp time (par.3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time, par.
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time, par.3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp-down Time, par.
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp-down Time).

NOTE
When the adjustable frequency drive is at the torque limit and has received a
stop command, it may not stop by itself. To ensure that the adjustable fre-
quency drive stops, configure a digital output to Torque limit & stop [27] and
connect this digital output to a digital input that is configured as coast.

[7] Ext. Interlock Same function as Coasting stop, inverse, but External Interlock generates
the alarm message ’external fault’ on the display when the terminal
which is programmed for Coast Inverse is logic ‘0’. The alarm message
will also be active via digital outputs and relay outputs, if programmed
for External Interlock. The alarm can be reset using a digital input or the
[RESET] key if the cause for the External Interlock has been removed. A
delay can be programmed in par.22-00 External Interlock Delay, External
Interlock Time. After applying a signal to the input, the reaction described
above will be delayed with the time set in par.22-00 External Interlock
Delay.
[8] Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic ‘1’ = start, logic ‘0’ = stop.
(Default Digital input 18)
[9] Latched start Motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min. 2 ms. Motor stops when Stop
inverse is activated
[10] Reversing Changes direction of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic ‘1’ to reverse. The
reversing signal only changes the direction of rotation. It does not acti-
vate the start function. Select both directions in par.4-10 Motor Speed
Direction.

6-30 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
(Default Digital input 19).
[11] Start reversing Used for start/stop and for reversing on the same wire. Signals on start
are not allowed at the same time.
[14] Jog Used for activating jog speed. See par.3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
(Default Digital input 29)
[15] Preset reference on Used for shifting between external reference and preset reference. It is
assumed that External/preset [1] has been selected in par.3-04 Reference
Function. Logic '0' = external reference active; logic '1' = one of the eight
preset references is active.
[16] Preset ref bit 0 Enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according
to the table below.
[17] Preset ref bit 1 Enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according
to the table below.
[18] Preset ref bit 2 Enables a choice between one of the eight preset references according
to the table below.

Preset ref. bit 2 1 0

Preset ref. 0 0 0 0
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1

[19] Freeze ref Freezes actual reference. The frozen reference is now the point of enable/
condition for Speed up and Slow to be used. If Speed up/down is used,
the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par.3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up
Time and par.3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time) in the range 0–par.
3-03 Maximum Reference. (For closed-loop, see par.20-14 Maximum
Reference/Feedb.).
[20] Freeze output Freezes actual motor frequency (Hz). The frozen motor frequency is now
the point of enable/condition for Speed up and Slow to be used. If Speed
up/down is used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 (par.
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time and par.3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time) in
the range 0–par.1-23 Motor Frequency.

NOTE
When Freeze output is active, the adjustable frequency drive cannot be stop-
ped via a low ‘start [13]’ signal. Stop the adjustable frequency drive via a ter-
minal programmed for Coasting inverse [2] or Coast and reset, inverse [3].

[21] Speed up For digital control of the up/down speed is desired (motor potentiome-
ter). Activate this function by selecting either Freeze reference or Freeze
output. When Speed up is activated for less than 400 msec. the resulting
reference will be increased by 0.1 %. If Speed up is activated for more
than 400 msec., the resulting reference will ramp according to Ramp 1
in par.3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time.
[22] Slow Same as Speed up [21].

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-31

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[23] Set-up select bit 0 Selects one of the four set-ups. Set par. 0-10 to Multi Set-up.
[24] Set-up select bit 1 Same as Set-up select bit 0 [23].
(Default Digital input 32)
[32] Pulse input Select Pulse input when using a pulse sequence as either reference or
feedback. Scaling is done in par. group 5-5*.
[34] Ramp bit 0 Select which ramp to use. Logic “0” will select ramp 1 while logic “1”
will select ramp 2.
[36] Line failure inverse Select to activate function selected in par.14-10 Line Failure. Line failure
is active in the Logic “0” situation.
[37] Fire mode A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into fire mode
and all other commands will be disregarded. See 24-0* Fire Mode.
[52] Run Permissive The input terminal, for which the Run permissive has been programmed
must be logic “1” before a start command can be accepted. Run permis-
sive has a logic ‘AND’ function related to the terminal which is program-
med for START [8], Jog [14] or Freeze Output [20], which means that in
order to start running the motor, both conditions must be fulfilled. If Run
Permissive is programmed on multiple terminals, Run permissive needs
only be logic ‘1’ on one of the terminals for the function to be carried out.
The digital output signal for Run Request (Start [8], Jog [14] or Freeze
output [20]) programmed in par. 5-3*, or par. 5-4*, will not be affected
by Run Permissive.
NOTE: If no Run Permissive signal is applied but either Run, Jog or Freeze
commands is activated, the status line in the display will show either Run
Requested, Jog Requested or Freeze Requested.
[53] Hand start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into hand mode
as if button Hand On on the keypad has been pressed and a normal stop
command will be overridden. If disconnecting the signal, the motor will
stop. To make any other start commands valid, another digital input must
be assigned to Auto-Start and a signal applied to this. The Hand On and
Auto On buttons on the keypad has no impact. The Off button on the
keypad will override Hand Start and Auto-Start. Press either the Hand
On or Auto On button to make Hand Start and Auto-Start active again. If
no signal on neither Hand Start nor Auto-Start, the motor will stop re-
gardless of any normal Start command applied. If signal applied to both
Hand Start and Auto-Start, the function will be Auto-Start. If pressing the
Off button on the keypad, the motor will stop regardless of signals on
Hand Start and Auto-Start.
[54] Auto start A signal applied will put the adjustable frequency drive into auto mode
as if the keypad button Auto On has been pressed. See also Hand Start
[53]
[55] DigiPot Increase Uses the input as an INCREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer func-
tion described in parameter group 3-9*
[56] DigiPot Decrease Uses the input as a DECREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer func-
tion described in parameter group 3-9*
[57] DigiPot Clear Uses the input to CLEAR the Digital Potentiometer reference described
in parameter group 3-9*
[60] Counter A (up) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC counter.
[61] Counter A (down) (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC counter.
[62] Reset Counter A Input for reset of counter A.

6-32 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[63] Counter B (up) (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for increment counting in the SLC coun-
ter.
[64] Counter B (down) (Terminal 29 and 33 only) Input for decrement counting in the SLC coun-
ter.
[65] Reset Counter B Input for reset of counter B.
[66] Sleep Mode Forces the adjustable frequency drive into sleep mode (see par. 22-4*).
Reacts on the rising edge of signal applied!
[78] Reset Preventive Mainte- Resets all data in par.16-96 Maintenance Word to 0.
nance Word

5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input

Same options and functions as par. 5-1*, except for Pulse input.

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Reset
[2] Coast inverse
[3] Coast and Reset Inv
[5] DC brake inverse
[6] Stop inverse
[7] External interlock
[8] Start
[9] Latched start
[10] Reverse
[11] Start reverse
[14] Jog
[15] Preset reference on
[16] Preset ref bit 0
[17] Preset ref bit 1
[18] Preset ref bit 2
[19] Freeze reference
[20] Freeze output
[21] Speed up
[22] Slow
[23] Set-up select bit 0
[24] Set-up select bit 1
[34] Ramp bit 0
[36] Mains failure inverse
[37] Fire Mode
[52] Run permissive
[53] Hand start
[54] Auto-start
[55] DigiPot increase
[56] DigiPot decrease
[57] DigiPot clear
[62] Reset Counter A

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-33

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[65] Reset Counter B
[66] Sleep Mode
[67] No Flow
[68] Timed Actions Disabled
[69] Constant OFF Actions
[70] Constant ON Actions
[78] Reset Preventive Mainte-
nance Word

5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input

Option: Function:
[0] * No Operation Same options and functions as par. 5-1* Digital Inputs.

5-40 Function Relay

Array [8]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1]
Option MCB 105: Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7] and Relay 9 [8]).
Select options to define the function of the relays.
The selection of each mechanical relay is realized in an array parameter.

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation
[1] Control ready
[2] Drive ready
[3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[4] Stand-by / no warning
[5] * Running Default setting for relay 2.

[6] Running / no warning

[8] Run on ref/no warn
[9] * Alarm Default setting for relay 1.

[10] Alarm or warning

[11] At torque limit
[12] Out of current range
[13] Below current, low
[14] Above current, high
[15] Out of speed range
[16] Below speed, low
[17] Above speed, high
[18] Out of feedb. range
[19] Below feedback, low
[20] Above feedback, high
[21] Thermal warning
[25] Reverse
[26] Bus OK
[27] Torque limit stop
[28] Brake: No Brake War

6-34 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[29] Brake ready, no fault
[30] Brake fault (IGBT)
[35] External Interlock
[36] Control word bit 11
[37] Control word bit 12
[40] Out of ref range
[41] Below reference, low
[42] Above ref, high
[45] Bus ctrl.
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout
[60] Comparator 0
[61] Comparator 1
[62] Comparator 2
[63] Comparator 3
[64] Comparator 4
[65] Comparator 5
[70] Logic rule 0
[71] Logic rule 1
[72] Logic rule 2
[73] Logic rule 3
[74] Logic rule 4
[75] Logic rule 5
[80] SL digital output A
[81] SL digital output B
[82] SL digital output C
[83] SL digital output D
[84] SL digital output E
[85] SL digital output F
[160] No alarm
[161] Running reverse
[165] Local ref active
[166] Remote ref active
[167] Start cmd. active
[168] Hand mode
[169] Auto mode
[180] Clock Fault
[181] Prev. Maintenance
[190] No-Flow
[193] Sleep Mode
[194] Broken Belt
[195] Bypass Valve Control
[196] Fire Mode Active

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-35

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[197] Fire Mode Was Active
[198] Bypass Mode Active
[220] Run Confirmation

6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time

Range: Function:
10 s* [1 - 99 s] Enter the Live Zero Timeout time period. Live Zero Timeout Time is active
for analog inputs, i.e., terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference or
feedback sources. If the reference signal value associated with the se-
lected current input falls below 50% of the value set in par.6-10 Terminal
53 Low Voltage, par.6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, par.6-20 Terminal 54
Low Voltage or par.6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period longer
than the time set in par.6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time, the function selec-
ted in par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function will be activated.

6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function

Option: Function:
Select the timeout function. The function set in par.6-01 Live Zero Time-
out Function will be activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or 54 is
below 50% of the value in par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage, par.
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, par.6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or par.
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a time period defined in par.6-00 Live
Zero Timeout Time. If several timeouts occur simultaneously, the ad-
justable frequency drive prioritizes the timeout functions as follows:
1. Par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
2. Par.8-04 Control Timeout Function
The output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive can be:
• [1] frozen at the present value
• [2] overruled to stop
• [3] overruled to jog speed
• [4] overruled to max. speed
• [5] overruled to stop with subsequent trip

[0] * Off
[1] Freeze output
[2] Stop
[3] Jogging
[4] Max. speed
[5] Stop and trip

6-36 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive

6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage

Range: Function:
0.07 V* [Application dependant] Enter the low voltage value. This analog input scaling value should cor-
respond to the low reference/feedback value set in par.6-14 Terminal 53
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage

Range: Function:
10.00 V* [Application dependant] Enter the high voltage value. This analog input scaling value should cor-
respond to the high reference/feedback value set in par.6-15 Terminal 53
High Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current

Range: Function:
4.00 [Application dependant] Enter the low current value. This reference signal should correspond to
mA* the low reference/feedback value, set in par.6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./
Feedb. Value. The value must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the Live
Zero Timeout Function in par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.

6-13 Terminal 53 High Current

Range: Function:
20.00 [Application dependant] Enter the high current value corresponding to the high reference/feed-
mA* back set in par.6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0.000* [-999999.999 - 999999.999 ] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the low voltage/
low current set in par.6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage and par.6-12 Termi-
nal 53 Low Current.

6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
Applica- [-999999.999 - 999999.999 ]
tion de-
pend-
ent*

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-37

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant
Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10.000 s] Enter the time constant. This is a first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise in terminal 53. A high time con-
stant value improves dampening but also increases the time delay
through the filter.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero

Option: Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable the Live Zero monitoring. For
example, this is to be used if the analog outputs are used as part of a de-
central I/O system (e.g., when not used as part of any adjustable fre-
quency drive related control functions, but for feeding a building man-
agement system with data).

[0] Disabled
[1] * Enabled

6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage

Range: Function:
0.07 V* [Application dependant] Enter the low voltage value. This analog input scaling value should cor-
respond to the low reference/feedback value, set in par.6-24 Terminal 54
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage

Range: Function:
10.00 V* [Application dependant] Enter the high voltage value. This analog input scaling value should cor-
respond to the high reference/feedback value set in par.6-25 Terminal 54
High Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current

Range: Function:
4.00 [Application dependant] Enter the low current value. This reference signal should correspond to
mA* the low reference/feedback value, set in par.6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./
Feedb. Value. The value must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the Live
Zero Timeout Function in par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.

6-23 Terminal 54 High Current

Range: Function:
20.00 [Application dependant] Enter the high current value corresponding to the high reference/feed-
mA* back value set in par.6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0.000* [-999999.999 - 999999.999 ] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the low voltage/
low current value set in par.6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage and par.
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current.

6-38 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
100.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 ] Enter the analog input scaling value that corresponds to the high voltage/
* high current value set in par.6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage and par.
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current.

6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant

Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10.000 s] Enter the time constant. This is a first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise in terminal 54. A high time con-
stant value improves dampening but also increases the time delay
through the filter.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero

Option: Function:
This parameter makes it possible to disable the Live Zero monitoring. For
example, this to be used if the analog outputs are used as part of a de-
central I/O system (e.g., when used not as part of any adjustable fre-
quency drive related control functions, but for feeding a building man-
agement system with data).

[0] Disabled
[1] * Enabled

6-50 Terminal 42 Output

Option: Function:
Select the function of Terminal 42 as an analog current output. A motor
current of 20 mA corresponds to Imax.

[0] * No operation
[100] Output frequency 0–100 Hz, (0–20 mA)

[101] Reference Minimum reference - Maximum reference, (0–20 mA)

[102] Feedback -200% to +200% of par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb., (0–20 mA)

[103] Motor current 0 - Inverter Max. Current (par.16-37 Inv. Max. Current), (0–20 mA)

[104] Torque rel to limit 0 - Torque limit (par.4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode), (0–20 mA)

[105] Torq relate to rated 0 - Motor rated torque, (0–20 mA)

[106] Power 0 - Motor rated power, (0–20 mA)

[107] * Speed 0 - Speed High Limit (par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] and par.
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]), (0–20 mA)

[113] Ext. Closed-loop 1 0–100%, (0–20 mA)

[114] Ext. Closed-loop 2 0–100%, (0–20 mA)

[115] Ext. Closed-loop 3 0–100%, (0–20 mA)

[130] Output freq. 4-20mA 0–100 Hz

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-39

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[131] Reference 4-20mA Minimum Reference - Maximum Reference

[132] Feedback 4-20mA -200% to +200% of par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.

[133] Motor cur. 4-20mA 0 - Inverter Max. Current (par.16-37 Inv. Max. Current)

[134] Torq.% lim 4-20 mA 0 - Torque limit (par.4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode)

[135] Torq.% nom 4-20 mA 0 - Motor rated torque

[136] Power 4-20mA 0 - Motor rated power

[137] Speed 4-20mA 0 - Speed High Limit (4-13 and 4-14)

[139] Bus ctrl. 0–100%, (0–20 mA)

[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20 mA 0 - 100%

[141] Bus ctrl t.o. 0–100%, (0–20 mA)

[142] Bus ctrl 4-20mA t.o. 0 - 100%

[143] Ext. Closed-loop 1 4-20 mA 0 - 100%

[144] Ext. Closed-loop 2 4-20 mA 0 - 100%

[145] Ext. Closed-loop 3 4-20 mA 0 - 100%

NOTE: Values for setting the minimum reference are found in open-loop par.3-02 Minimum Reference and for
closed-loop par.20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. - values for maximum reference for open-loop are found in
par.3-03 Maximum Reference and for closed-loop par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb..

6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale

Range: Function:
0.00 %* [0.00 - 200.00 %]

6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

Range: Function:
100.00 [0.00 - 200.00 %]
%*

EXAMPLE 1:
Variable value= OUTPUT FREQUENCY, range = 0–100 Hz
Range needed for output = 0–50 Hz
Output signal 0 or 4 mA is needed at 0 Hz (0% of range) - set par.6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0%
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 50 Hz (50% of range) - set par.6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 50%
 

6-40 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
EXAMPLE 2:
Variable= FEEDBACK, range= -200% to +200%
Range needed for output= 0–100%
Output signal 0 or 4 mA is needed at 0% (50% of range) - set par.6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 50%
Output signal 20 mA is needed at 100% (75% of range) - set par.6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 75%

 
EXAMPLE 3:
Variable value= REFERENCE, range= Min ref - Max ref
Range needed for output= Min ref (0%) - Max ref (100%), 0–10 mA
Output signal 0 or 4 mA is needed at Min ref - set par.6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale to 0%
Output signal 10 mA is needed at Max ref (100% of range) - set par.6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale to 200%
(20 mA / 10 mA x 100%=200%).

 

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-41

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
14-01 Switching Frequency
Option: Function:
Select the inverter switching frequency. Changing the switching fre-
quency can help to reduce acoustic noise from the motor.
NOTE: The output frequency value of the adjustable frequency drive
must never exceed 1/10 of the switching frequency. When the motor is
running, adjust the switching frequency in par.14-01 Switching Frequen-
cy until the motor is as noiseless as possible. See also par.14-00 Switch-
ing Pattern and the section Derating.

[0] 1.0 kHz

[1] 1.5 kHz
[2] 2.0 kHz
[3] 2.5 kHz
[4] 3.0 kHz
[5] 3.5 kHz
[6] 4.0 kHz
[7] * 5.0 kHz
[8] 6.0 kHz
[9] 7.0 kHz
[10] 8.0 kHz
[11] 10.0 kHz
[12] 12.0 kHz
[13] 14.0 kHz
[14] 16.0 kHz

14-03 Overmodulation
Option: Function:
[0] Off Selects no overmodulation of the output voltage in order to avoid torque
ripple on the motor shaft.

[1] * On The overmodulation function generates an extra voltage of up to 8% of

Umax output voltage without overmodulation, which results in an extra
torque of 10–12% in the middle of the oversyncronous range (from 0%
at nominal speed rising to approximately 12% at double nominal speed).

6-42 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
20-00 Feedback 1 Source
Option: Function:
Up to three different feedback signals can be used to provide the feed-
back signal for the adjustable frequency drive’s PID controller.
This parameter defines which input will be used as the source of the first
feedback signal.
Analog input X30/11 and Analog input X30/12 refer to inputs on the op-
tional general purpose I/O board.

[0] No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] * Analog input 54
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33
[7] Analog input X30/11
[8] Analog input X30/12
[9] Analog Input X42/1
[10] Analog Input X42/3
[11] Analog Input X42/5
[12] Analog Input X49/1
[13] Analog Input X49/3
[14] Analog Input X49/5
[100] Bus feedback 1
[101] Bus feedback 2
[102] Bus feedback 3

NOTE: If a feedback is not used, its source must be set to No Function [0]. Par.20-20 Feedback Function deter-
mines how the three possible feedbacks will be used by the PID controller.

20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion

Option: Function:
This parameter allows a conversion function to be applied to Feedback
1.

[0] * Linear Linear [0] has no effect on the feedback.

[1] Square root Square root [1] is commonly used when a pressure sensor is used to
provide flow feedback (( flow ∝ pressure )).

[2] Pressure to temperature Pressure to temperature [2] is used in compressor applications to pro-
vide temperature feedback using a pressure sensor. The temperature of
the refrigerant is calculated using the following formula:
A2
Temperature = ( ( − A3, where A1, A2 and A3 are re-
ln Pe + 1) − A1)
frigerant-specific constants. The refrigerant must be selected in par.
20-30 Refrigerant. Par.20-21 Setpoint 1 through par.20-23 Setpoint 3 al-
low the values of A1, A2 and A3 to be entered for a refrigerant that is not
listed in par.20-30 Refrigerant.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-43

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit
Option: Function:
This parameter determines the unit that is used for this feedback source,
prior to applying the feedback conversion of par.20-01 Feedback 1 Con-
version. This unit is not used by the PID controller.

[0] *
[1] %
[5] PPM
[10] min
[11] RPM
[12] PULSE/s
[20] liter / sec.
[21] liter / min
[22] liter / hr.
[23] m³ / sec.
[24] m³/min
[25] m³ / hr.
[30] kg / sec.
[31] kg/min
[32] kg / hr.
[33] ton / min
[34] ton / hr.
[40] m / sec.
[41] m/min
[45] m
[60] °C
[70] mbar
[71] bar
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
[74] m WG
[75] mm Hg
[80] kW
[120] GPM
[121] gal / sec.
[122] gal/min
[123] gal / hr.
[124] CFM
[125] ft³/s
[126] ft³/min
[127] ft³/h
[130] lbs / sec.
[131] lbs / min.
[132] lbs / hr.

6-44 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[160] °F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in²
[172] in. wtr. gage
[173] ft WG
[174] in Hg
[180] HP

NOTE: This parameter is only available when using pressure to temperature feedback conversion.
If the choice Linear [0] is selected in par.20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion, then the setting of any choice in par.
20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit does not matter as conversion will be one-to-one.

20-03 Feedback 2 Source

Option: Function:
See par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source for details.

[0] * No function
[1] Analog input 53
[2] Analog input 54
[3] Pulse input 29
[4] Pulse input 33
[7] Analog input X30/11
[8] Analog input X30/12
[9] Analog Input X42/1
[10] Analog Input X42/3
[11] Analog Input X42/5
[12] Analog Input X49/1
[13] Analog Input X49/3
[14] Analog Input X49/5
[100] Bus feedback 1
[101] Bus feedback 2
[102] Bus feedback 3

20-04 Feedback 2 Conversion

Option: Function:
See par.20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for details.

[0] * Linear
[1] Square root
[2] Pressure to temperature

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-45

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
20-07 Feedback 3 Conversion
Option: Function:
See par.20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion for details.

[0] * Linear
[1] Square root
[2] Pressure to temperature

20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit

Option: Function:
See par.20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit for details.

20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb.

Range: Function:
0.000 [Application dependant] Enter the desired minimum value for the remote reference when oper-
Proc- ating with par.1-00 Configuration Mode set for Closed-loop [3] operation.
essCtrlU- Units are set in par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit.
nit*
Minimum feedback will be -200% of either the value set in par.
20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. or in par.20-14 Maximum Reference/
Feedb., which ever numeric value is the highest.

NOTE: If operating with par.1-00 Configuration Mode set for Open-loop [0], par.3-02 Minimum Reference must
be used.

20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb.

Range: Function:
100.000 [Application dependant] Enter the maximum reference/feedback for closed-loop operation. The
Proc- setting determines the highest value obtainable by summing all refer-
essCtrlU- ence sources for closed-loop operation. The setting determines 100%
nit* feedback in open-loop and closed-loop (total feedback range: -200% to
+200%).

NOTE: If operating with par.1-00 Configuration Mode set for Open-loop [0], par.3-03 Maximum Reference must
be used.

20-20 Feedback Function

Option: Function:
This parameter determines how the three possible feedbacks will be
used to control the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive.

[0] Sum Sum [0] sets up the PID Controller to use the sum of Feedback 1, Feed-
back 2 and Feedback 3 as the feedback.
NOTE: Any unused feedbacks must be set to No Function in par.
20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or par.
20-06 Feedback 3 Source.
The sum of Setpoint 1 and any other references that are enabled (see
par. group 3-1*) will be used as the PID Controller’s setpoint reference.

[1] Difference Difference [1] sets up the PID controller to use the difference between
Feedback 1 and Feedback 2 as the feedback. Feedback 3 will not be used
with this selection. Only Setpoint 1 will be used. The sum of Setpoint 1

6-46 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
and any other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be
used as the PID controller’s setpoint reference.

[2] Average Average [2] sets up the PID Controller to use the average of Feedback 1,
Feedback 2 and Feedback 3 as the feedback.
NOTE: Any unused feedbacks must be set to No Function in par.
20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or par.
20-06 Feedback 3 Source. The sum of Setpoint 1 and any other references
that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be used as the PID Controller’s
setpoint reference.

[3] * Minimum Minimum [3] sets up the PID controller to compare Feedback 1, Feedback
2 and Feedback 3 and use the lowest value as the feedback.
NOTE: Any unused feedbacks must be set to No Function in par.
20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or par.
20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Only setpoint 1 will be used. The sum of Set-
point 1 and any other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*)
will be used as the PID controller’s setpoint reference.

[4] Maximum Maximum [4] sets up the PID controller to compare Feedback 1, Feedback
2 and Feedback 3 and use the highest value as the feedback.
NOTE: Any unused feedbacks must be set to No Function in par.
20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.20-03 Feedback 2 Source, or par.
20-06 Feedback 3 Source.
Only Setpoint 1 will be used. The sum of Setpoint 1 and any other refer-
ences that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*) will be used as the PID con-
troller’s setpoint reference.

[5] Multi Setpoint Min Multi-setpoint minimum [5] sets up the PID Controller to calculate the
difference between Feedback 1 and Setpoint 1, Feedback 2 and Setpoint
2, and Feedback 3 and Setpoint 3. It will use the feedback/setpoint pair
in which the feedback is the farthest below its corresponding setpoint
reference. If all feedback signals are above their corresponding setpoints,
the PID Controller will use the feedback/setpoint pair in which the differ-
ence between the feedback and setpoint is the least.
NOTE: If only two feedback signals are used, the feedback that is not to
be used must be set to No Function in par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.
20-03 Feedback 2 Source or par.20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note that each
setpoint reference will be the sum of its respective parameter value (par.
20-21 Setpoint 1, par.20-22 Setpoint 2 and par.20-23 Setpoint 3) and any
other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*).

[6] Multi Setpoint Max Multi-setpoint maximum [6] sets up the PID Controller to calculate the
difference between Feedback 1 and Setpoint 1, Feedback 2 and Setpoint
2, and Feedback 3 and Setpoint 3. It will use the feedback/setpoint pair
in which the feedback is farthest above its corresponding setpoint refer-
ence. If all feedback signals are below their corresponding setpoints, the
PID Controller will use the feedback/setpoint pair in which the difference
between the feedback and the setpoint reference is the least.
NOTE: If only two feedback signals are used, the feedback that is not to
be used must be set to No Function in par.20-00 Feedback 1 Source, par.
20-03 Feedback 2 Source or par.20-06 Feedback 3 Source. Note that each
setpoint reference will be the sum of its respective parameter value (par.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-47

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
20-21 Setpoint 1, par.20-22 Setpoint 2 and par.20-23 Setpoint 3) and any
other references that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*).

NOTE: Any unused feedback must be set to “No function” in its Feedback Source parameter: Par.20-00 Feedback
1 Source, par.20-03 Feedback 2 Source or par.20-06 Feedback 3 Source.

The feedback resulting from the function selected in par.20-20 Feedback Function will be used by the PID con-
troller to control the output frequency of the adjustable frequency drive. This feedback can also be shown on
the adjustable frequency drive’s display, be used to control an adjustable frequency drive's analog output, and
be transmitted over various serial communication protocols.

The adjustable frequency drive can be configured to handle multi-zone applications. Two different multi-zone
applications are supported:
• Multi-zone, single setpoint
• Multi-zone, multi setpoint
The difference between the two is illustrated by the following examples:

Example 1: Multi-zone, single setpoint

In an office building, a VAV (variable air volume) TR200 system must ensure a minimum pressure at selected
VAV boxes. Due to the varying pressure losses in each duct, the pressure at each VAV box cannot be assumed
to be the same. The minimum pressure required is the same for all VAV boxes. This control method can be set
up by setting par.20-20 Feedback Function to option [3], Minimum, and entering the desired pressure in par.
20-21 Setpoint 1. The PID controller will increase the speed of the fan if any one feedback is below the setpoint,
and decrease the speed of the fan if all feedbacks are above the setpoint.

Example 2: Multi-zone, multi setpoint

The previous example can be used to illustrate the use of multi-zone, multi-setpoint control. If the zones require
different pressures for each VAV box, each setpoint may be specified in par.20-21 Setpoint 1, par.20-22 Setpoint
2 and par.20-23 Setpoint 3. By selecting Multi-setpoint minimum, [5], in par.20-20 Feedback Function, the PID
controller will increase the speed of the fan if any one of the feedbacks is below its setpoint and decrease the
speed of the fan if all feedbacks are above their individual setpoints.

6-48 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
20-21 Setpoint 1
Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Setpoint 1 is used in closed-loop mode to enter a setpoint reference that
Proc- ProcessCtrlUnit] is used by the adjustable frequency drive’s PID controller. See the de-
essCtrlU- scription of par.20-20 Feedback Function.
nit*
NOTE: Setpoint reference entered here is added to any other references
that are enabled (see par. group 3-1*).

20-22 Setpoint 2
Range: Function:
0.000 [-999999.999 - 999999.999 Setpoint 2 is used in closed-loop mode to enter a setpoint reference that
Proc- ProcessCtrlUnit] may be used by the adjustable frequency drive’s PID controller. See the
essCtrlU- description of Feedback Function, par.20-20 Feedback Function.
nit*

NOTE: The setpoint reference entered here is added to any other references that are enabled (see par. group
3-1*).

20-70 Closed-loop Type

Option: Function:
This parameter defines the application response. The default mode
should be sufficient for most applications. If the application response
speed is known, it can be selected here. This will decrease the time nee-
ded for carrying out PID autotuning. The setting has no impact on the
value of the tuned parameters and is used only for the autotuning se-
quence.

[0] * Auto
[1] Fast Pressure
[2] Slow Pressure
[3] Fast Temperature
[4] Slow Temperature

20-71 Tuning Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Normal Normal setting of this parameter will be suitable for pressure control in
fan systems.

[1] Fast Fast setting would generally be used in pumping systems, where a faster
control response is desirable.

20-72 PID Output Change

Range: Function:
0.10* [0.01 - 0.50 ] This parameter sets the magnitude of step change during autotuning.
The value is a percentage of full speed. This means that if the maximum
output frequency inpar.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]/par.4-14 Mo-
tor Speed High Limit [Hz] is set to 50 Hz, 0.10 is 10% of 50 Hz, which is 5
Hz. This parameter should be set to a value resulting in feedback changes
of between 10% and 20% for best tuning accuracy.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-49

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level
Range: Function:
-999999. [Application dependant] The minimum allowable feedback level should be entered here in user
000 units as defined in par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit. If the level falls
Proc- below par.20-73 Minimum Feedback Level, autotuning is aborted and an
essCtrlU- error message will appear on the keypad.
nit*

20-74 Maximum Feedback Level

Range: Function:
999999. [Application dependant] The maximum allowable feedback level should be entered here in user
000 units as defined in par.20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit. If the level rises
Proc- above par.20-74 Maximum Feedback Level, autotuning is aborted and an
essCtrlU- error message will appear on the keypad.
nit*

20-79 PID Auto Tuning

Option: Function:
This parameter starts the PID autotuning sequence. Once the autotuning
has successfully completed and the settings have been accepted or re-
jected by the user, by pressing [OK] or [Cancel] buttons on the keypad at
the end of tuning, this parameter is reset to [0] Disabled.

[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled

20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control

Option: Function:
[0] * Normal Normal [0] causes the adjustable frequency drive’s output frequency to
decrease when the feedback is greater than the setpoint reference. This
is common for pressure-controlled supply fan and pump applications.

[1] Inverse Inverse [1] causes the adjustable frequency drive’s output frequency to
increase when the feedback is greater than the setpoint reference. This
is common for temperature-controlled cooling applications, such as
cooling towers.

20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] When the adjustable frequency drive is first started, it initially ramps up
tion de- to this output speed in open-loop mode, following the active ramp-up
pend- time. When the output speed programmed here is reached, the adjusta-
ent* ble frequency drive will automatically switch to closed-loop mode and
the PID controller will begin to function. This is useful in applications in
which the driven load must first quickly accelerate to a minimum speed
when it is started.
NOTE: This parameter will only be visible if par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit
is set to [0], RPM.

6-50 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz]
Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] When the adjustable frequency drive is first started, it initially ramps up
tion de- to this output frequency in open-loop mode, following the active ramp-
pend- up time. When the output frequency programmed here is reached, the
ent* adjustable frequency drive will automatically switch to closed-loop
mode and the PID controller will begin to function. This is useful in ap-
plications in which the driven load must first quickly accelerate to a min-
imum speed when it is started.
NOTE: This parameter will only be visible if par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit
is set to [1], Hz.

20-93 PID Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.50* [0.00 - 10.00 ]

If (Error x Gain) jumps with a value equal to what is set in par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. the PID controller
will try to change the output speed equal to what is set in par.4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] / par.4-14 Motor
Speed High Limit [Hz] but in practice of course limited by this setting.
The proportional band (error causing output to change from 0–100%) can be calculated by means of the formula:

( Proportional
1
Gain )
× (Max Reference )
NOTE: Always set the desired for par.20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. before setting the values for the PID
controller in par. group 20-9*.

20-94 PID Integral Time

Range: Function:
20.00 s* [0.01 - 10000.00 s] Over time, the integrator accumulates a contribution to the output from
the PID controller as long as there is a deviation between the reference/
setpoint and feedback signals. The contribution is proportional to the size
of the deviation. This ensures that the deviation (error) approaches zero.
Quick response on any deviation is obtained when the integral time is
set to a low value. Setting it too low, however, may cause the control to
become unstable.
The value set is the time needed for the integrator to add the same con-
tribution as the proportional part for a certain deviation.
If the value is set to 10,000, the controller will act as a pure proportional
controller with a P-band based on the value set in par.20-93 PID Propor-
tional Gain. When no deviation is present, the output from the propor-
tional controller will be 0.

22-22 Low Speed Detection

Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled Select Enabled for detecting when the motor operates with a speed as
set in par.4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] or par.4-12 Motor Speed
Low Limit [Hz].

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-51

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
22-23 No-Flow Function
Common actions for Low Power Detection and Low Speed Detection (Individual selections not possible).

Option: Function:
[0] * OFF
[1] Sleep Mode The drive will enter sleep mode and stop when a No Flow condition is
detected. See parameter group 22-4* for programming options for sleep
mode.

[2] Warning The drive will continue to run, but activate a No-Flow Warning [W92]. A
drive digital output or a serial communication bus can communicate a
warning to other equipment.

[3] Alarm The drive will stop running and activate a No-Flow Alarm [A 92]. A drive
digital output or a serial communication bus can communicate an alarm
to other equipment.

Note
Do not set par.14-20 Reset Mode to [13] Infinite auto reset when par.22-23 No-Flow Functionis set to [3] Alarm.
Doing so will cause the drive to continuously cycle between running and stopping when a No Flow condition is
detected.

Note
If the drive is equipped with a constant speed bypass with an automatic bypass function that starts the bypass
if the drive experiences a persistent alarm condition, be sure to disable the bypass’ automatic bypass function,
if [3] Alarm is selected as the No-Flow Function.

22-24 No-Flow Delay

Range: Function:
10 s* [1 - 600 s] Set the time. Low Power/Low Speed must remain detected to activate
signal for actions. If detection disappears before the timer runs out, the
timer will be reset.

22-40 Minimum Run Time

Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the desired minimum running time for the motor after a start com-
mand (digital input or bus) before entering sleep mode.

22-41 Minimum Sleep Time

Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the desired minimum time for staying in sleep mode. This will over-
ride any wake-up conditions.

22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] To be used if par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit has been set for RPM (parameter
tion de- not visible if Hz selected). Only to be used if par.1-00 Configuration
pend- Mode is set for open-loop and speed reference is applied by an external
ent* controller.
Set the reference speed at which sleep mode should be canceled.

6-52 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz]
Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] To be used if par.0-02 Motor Speed Unit has been set for Hz (parameter
tion de- not visible if RPM selected). Only to be used if par.1-00 Configuration
pend- Mode is set for open-loop and speed reference is applied by an external
ent* controller controlling the pressure.
Set the reference speed at which sleep mode should be canceled.

22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference

Range: Function:
10 %* [0 - 100 %] Only to be used if par.1-00 Configuration Mode is set for closed-loop and
the integrated PI controller is used for controlling the pressure.
Set the pressure drop allowed in percentage of setpoint for the pressure
(Pset) before canceling the sleep mode.

NOTE: If used in application where the integrated PI controller is set for inverse control (e.g., cooling tower
applications) in par.20-71 Tuning Mode, the value set in par.22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference will automatically
be added.

22-45 Setpoint Boost

Range: Function:
0 %* [-100 - 100 %] Only to be used if par.1-00 Configuration Mode, is set for closed-loop and
the integrated PI controller is used. For example, in systems with con-
stant pressure control, it is advantageous to increase the system pres-
sure before the motor is stopped. This will extend the time during which
the motor is stopped and help to avoid frequent start/stop.
Set the desired overpressure/temperature as a percentage of the setpoint
for the pressure (Pset)/temperature before entering sleep mode.
If set at 5%, the boost pressure will be Pset*1.05. The negative values
can be used, for example, for cooling tower control, where a negative
change is needed.

22-46 Maximum Boost Time

Range: Function:
60 s* [0 - 600 s] Only to be used if par.1-00 Configuration Mode is set for closed-loop and
the integrated PI controller is used for controlling the pressure.
Set the maximum time for which boost mode will be allowed. If the set
time is exceeded, sleep mode will be entered and will not wait for the set
boost pressure to be reached.

22-60 Broken Belt Function

Selects the action to be performed if the broken belt condition is detected.

Option: Function:
[0] * OFF
[1] Warning The drive will continue to run, but activate a Broken Belt Warning [W95].
A drive digital output or a serial communication bus can communicate a
warning to other equipment.

[2] Trip The drive will stop running and activate a Broken Belt alarm [A 95]. A
drive digital output or a serial communication bus can communicate an
alarm to other equipment.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-53

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Note
Do not set par.14-20 Reset Mode to [13] Infinite auto reset when par.22-60 Broken Belt Function is set to [2] Trip.
Doing so will cause the drive to continuously cycle between running and stopping when a broken belt condition
is detected.

Note
If the drive is equipped with a constant speed bypass with an automatic bypass function that starts the bypass
if the drive experiences a persistent alarm condition, be sure to disable the bypass’ automatic bypass function,
if [2] Trip is selected as the broken belt function.

22-61 Broken Belt Torque

Range: Function:
10 %* [0 - 100 %] Sets the broken belt torque as a percentage of the rated motor torque.

22-62 Broken Belt Delay

Range: Function:
10 s [0 - 600 s] Sets the time for which the broken belt conditions must be active before
carrying out the action selected in par.22-60 Broken Belt Function.

22-75 Short Cycle Protection

Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled Timer set in par.22-76 Interval between Starts is disabled.

[1] Enabled Timer set in par.22-76 Interval between Starts is enabled.

22-76 Interval between Starts

Range: Function:
Applica- [Application dependant] Sets the time desired as minimum time between two starts. Any normal
tion de- start command (Start/Jog/Freeze) will be disregarded until the timer has
pend- expired.
ent*

22-77 Minimum Run Time

Range: Function:
0 s* [Application dependant] Sets the time desired as minimum run time after a normal start command
(Start/Jog/Freeze). Any normal stop command will be disregarded until
the set time has expired. The timer will start counting following a normal
start command (Start/Jog/Freeze).
The timer will be overridden by a Coast (Inverse) or an External Interlock
command.

NOTE: Does not work in cascade mode.

6-54 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Parameter Set-up
Group Title Function
0- Operation and Parameters used to program the fundamental functions of the adjustable fre-
Display quency drive and the keypad including: selection of language; selection of which
variables are displayed at each position in the display (e.g., static duct pressure
or condenser water return temperature can be displayed with the setpoint in
small digits in the top row and feedback in large digits in the center of the dis-
play); enabling/disabling of the keypad keys/buttons; passwords for the
keypad; upload and download of commissioned parameters to/from the
keypad and setting the built-in clock.
1- Load / Motor Parameters used to configure the adjustable frequency drive for the specific ap-
plication and motor including: open or closed-loop operation; type of application
such as compressor, fan or centrifugal pump; motor nameplate data; auto-tun-
ing of the drive to the motor for optimum performance; flying start (typically
used for fan applications) and motor thermal protection.
2- Brakes Parameters used to configure braking functions of the adjustable frequency
drive which although not common in many HVAC applications, can be useful on
special fan applications. Parameters including: DC braking; dynamic/resistor
braking and overvoltage control (which provides automatic adjustment of the
deceleration rate (auto-ramping) to avoid tripping when decelerating large in-
ertia fans)
3- Reference / Parameters used to program the minimum and maximum reference limits of
Ramps speed (RPM/Hz) in open-loop or in actual units when operating in closed-loop);
digital/preset references; jog speed; definition of the source of each reference
(e.g., which analog input the reference signal is connected to); ramp-up and
ramp-down times and digital potentiometer settings.
4- Limits / Warnings Parameters used to program limits and warnings of operation including: allow-
able motor direction; minimum and maximum motor speeds (e.g., in pump ap-
plications it is typical to program a minimum speed to approx 30-40% to ensure
pump seals are adequately lubricated at all times, avoid cavitation and ensure
adequate head is produced at all times to create flow); torque and current limits
to protect the pump, fan or compressor driven by the motor; warnings for low/
high current, speed, reference, and feedback; missing motor phase protection;
speed bypass frequencies including semi-automatic set-up of these frequencies
(e.g., to avoid resonance conditions on cooling tower and other fans).
5- Digital In / Out Parameters used to program the functions of all digital inputs, digital outputs,
relay outputs, pulse inputs and pulse outputs for terminals on the control card
and all option cards.
6- Analog In / Out Parameters used to program the functions associated with all analog inputs and
analog outputs for the terminals on the control card and General Purpose I/O
option (MCB101) including: analog input live zero timeout function (which, for
example, can be used to command a cooling tower fan to operate at full speed
if the condenser water return sensor fails); scaling of the analog input signals
(for example, to match the analog input to the mA and pressure range of a static
duct pressure sensor); filter time constant to filter out electrical noise on the
analog signal which can sometimes occur when long cables are installed; func-
tion and scaling of the analog outputs (for example, to provide an analog output
representing motor current or kW to an analog input of a DDC controller) and to
configure the analog outputs to be controlled by the BMS via a high level inter-
face (HLI) (e.g., to control a chilled water valve) including ability to define a de-
fault value of these outputs in the event of the HLI failing.

Table 6. 2: Parameter Groups

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-55

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Group Title Function
8- Communication Parameters used for configuring and monitoring functions associated with
and Options the serial communications / high level interface to the adjustable frequency
drive
11- LonWorks Parameters only applicable when a Lonworks option is installed.
13- Smart Logic Con- Parameters used to configure the built in Smart Logic Controller (SLC), which
troller can be used for simple functions such as comparators (e.g., if running above
xHz, activate output relay), timers (e.g., when a start signal is applied, first
activate output relay to open supply air damper and wait x seconds before
ramping up) or a more complex sequence of user defined actions executed
by the SLC when the associated user defined event is evaluated as TRUE by
the SLC. (For example, initiate an economizer mode in a simple AHU cooling
application control scheme where there is no BMS. For such an application,
the SLC can monitor the relative humidity of the outside air, and if it is below
a defined value, the supply air temperature setpoint could be automatically
increased. With the adjustable frequency drive monitoring the relative hu-
midity of the outside air and supply air temperature via its analog inputs and
controlling the chilled water valve via one of the extended PI(D) loops and an
analog output, it would then modulate that valve to maintain a higher supply
air temperature). The SLC can often replace the need for other external control
equipment.
14- Special Functions Parameters used to configure special functions of the adjustable frequency
drive including: setting of the switching frequency to reduce audible noise
from the motor (sometimes required for fan applications); kinetic backup
function (especially useful for critical applications in semi-conductor installa-
tions where performance under line power dip/line power loss is important);
line imbalance protection; automatic reset (to avoid the need for a manual
reset of alarms); energy optimization parameters (which typically do not need
changing but enable fine tuning of this automatic function (if necessary) en-
suring the adjustable frequency drive and motor combination operate at their
optimum efficiency at full and partial load conditions) and auto-derating func-
tions (which enable the adjustable frequency drive to continue operation at
reduced performance under extreme operating conditions ensuring maxi-
mum up time).
15- FC Information Parameters providing operating data and other drive information including:
operating and running hour counters; kWh counter; resetting of the running
and kWh counters; alarm/fault log (where the past 10 alarms are logged along
with any associated value and time) and drive and option card identification
parameters such as code number and software version.
16- Data Readouts Read only parameters which display the status/value of many operating var-
iables which can be displayed on the keypad or viewed in this parameter
group. These parameters can be particularly useful during commissioning
when interfacing with a BMS via a high level interface.
18- Info & Readouts Read-only parameters which display the last 10 preventative maintenance log
items, actions and time and the value of analog inputs and outputs on the
Analog I/O option card which can be particularly useful during commissioning
when interfacing with a BMS via a high level interface.

6-56 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Group Title Function
20- FC Closed-loop Parameters used to configure the closed-loop PI(D) controller which controls
the speed of the pump, fan or compressor in closed-loop mode including:
defining where each of the three possible feedback signals come from (e.g.,
which analog input or the BMS HLI); conversion factor for each of the feed-
back signals (e.g., where a pressure signal is used for indication of flow in an
AHU or converting from pressure to temperature in a compressor applica-
tion); engineering unit for the reference and feedback (e.g., Pa, kPa, m Wg, in
Wg, bar, m3/s, m3/h, °C, °F, etc); the function (e.g., sum, difference, average,
minimum or maximum) used to calculate the resulting feedback for single
zone applications or the control philosophy for multi-zone applications; pro-
gramming of the setpoint(s) and manual or auto-tuning of the PI(D) loop.
21- Extended Closed- Parameters used to configure the 3 extended closed-loop PI(D) controllers
loop which, for example, can be used to control external servos (e.g., chilled water
valve to maintain supply air temperature in a VAV system) including: engi-
neering unit for the reference and feedback of each controller (e.g., °C, °F,
etc); defining the range of the reference/setpoint for each controller; defining
where each of the references/setpoints and feedback signals come from (e.g.,
which analog input or the BMS HLI); programming of the setpoint and manual
or auto-tuning of each of the PI(D) controllers.
22- Application Func- Parameters used to monitor, protect and control pumps, fans and compres-
tions sors including: no flow detection and protection of pumps (including auto-
setup of this function); dry pump protection; end of curve detection and pro-
tection of pumps; sleep mode (especially useful for cooling tower and booster
pump sets); broken belt detection (typically used for fan applications to detect
no air flow instead of using a Δp switch installed across the fan); short cycle
protection of compressors and pump flow compensation of setpoint (espe-
cially useful for secondary chilled water pump applications where the Δp
sensor has been installed close to the pump and not across the furthest most
significant load(s) in the system; using this function can compensate for the
sensor installation and help to realize the maximum energy savings).
23- Time-based Func- Time based parameters including: those used to initiate daily or weekly ac-
tions tions based on the built-in real time clock (e.g., change of setpoint for night
set back mode or start/stop of the pump/fan/compressor start/stop of a ex-
ternal equipment); preventative maintenance functions which can be based
on running or operating hour time intervals or on specific dates and times;
energy log (especially useful in retrofit applications or where information of
the actual historical load (kW) on the pump/fan/compressor is of interest);
trending (especially useful in retrofit or other applications where there is an
interest to log operating power, current, frequency or speed of the pump/fan/
compressor for analysis and a payback counter.
24- Application Func- Parameters used to set up fire mode and/or to control a bypass contactor/
tions 2 starter if designed into the system.
25- Cascade Controller Parameters used to configure and monitor the built-in pump cascade con-
troller (typically used for pump booster sets).

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-57

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Parameter descriptions and selections are displayed on the graphic keypad. (See the relevant section for details.)
Access the parameters by pressing the [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] button on the control panel. The quick
menu is used primarily for commissioning the unit at start-up by providing the parameters necessary to start
operation. The main menu provides access to all the parameters for detailed application programming.

All digital input/output and analog input/output terminals are multifunctional. All terminals have factory default
functions suitable for the majority of HVAC applications but if other special functions are required, they must
be programmed as explained in parameter group 5 or 6.

Main Menu Mode

The keypad provides access to the main menu mode.
Select main menu mode by pressing the [Main Menu]
key. Figure 6.2 shows the resulting read-out, which
appears on the display of the GLCPkeypad.
Lines 2 through 5 on the display show a list of pa-
rameter groups which can be chosen by toggling the
up and down buttons.

Figure 6. 9: Display example.

Each parameter has a name and number which remain the same regardless of the programming mode. In main
menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The first digit of the parameter number (from the left)
indicates the parameter group number.

All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu. The configuration of the unit (par.1-00 Configuration Mode)
will determine other parameters available for programming. For example, selecting Closed-loop enables addi-
tional parameters related to closed-loop operation. Option cards added to the unit enable additional parameters
associated with the option device.

Changing Data
1. Press the [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] key.
2. Use [▲] and [▼] keys to find parameter group to edit.
3. Press the [OK] key.
4. Use [▲] and [▼] keys to find parameter to edit.
5. Press the [OK] key.
6. Use the [▲] and [▼] keys to select the correct parameter setting. Or, to move to digits within a number, use
the keys. The cursor indicates the digit selected to be changed. The [▲] key increases the value, the [▼] key
decreases the value.
7. Press the [Cancel] key to disregard the change, or press the [OK] key to accept the change and enter the
new setting.

6-58 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Changing a text value
If the selected parameter is a text value, it can be
changed by using the up/down navigation keys.
The up key increases the value, and the down key de-
creases the value. Place the cursor on the value to be
saved and press [OK].

Figure 6. 10: Display example.

Changing a group of numeric data values

If the chosen parameter represents a numeric data
value, change the chosen data value by means of the
[◄] and [►] navigation keys as well as the up/down
[▲] [▼] navigation keys. Use the ◄] and [►] navigation
keys to move the cursor horizontally.

Figure 6. 12: Display example.

Use the up/down navigation keys to change the data

value. The up key increases the data value, while the
down key reduces it. Place the cursor on the value to
be saved and press [OK].

Figure 6. 13: Display example.

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-59

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Changing of data value, Step-by-Step
Certain parameters can be changed step-by-step or by an infinite number of variables. This applies to par.
1-20 Motor Power [kW], par.1-22 Motor Voltage and par.1-23 Motor Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric data values, and as numeric data values using an infinite
number of variables.

Readout and programming of indexed parameters

Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
Par.15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code to par.15-32 Alarm Log: Time contain a fault log which can be read out. Choose
a parameter, press [OK], and use the up/down navigation keys to scroll through the value log.

Use par.3-10 Preset Reference as another example:

Choose the parameter, press [OK], and use the up/down navigation keys to scroll through the indexed values.
To change the parameter value, select the indexed value and press [OK]. Change the value by using the up/down
keys. Press [OK] to accept the new setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the parameter.

6-60 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Parameter Lists TR200
Default settings
Changes during operation:
“TRUE” means that the parameter can be changed while the adjustable frequency drive is in operation, and
“FALSE” means that the adjustable frequency drive must be stopped before a change can be made.

4 set-up:
'All set-up': the parameter can be set individually in each of the four set-ups, i. e., one single parameter can have
four different data values.
’1 set-up’: data value will be the same in all set-ups.

SR: N/A:
Size related No default value available.

Conversion index:
This number refers to a conversion figure used when writing or reading by means of an adjustable frequency
drive.

Conv. in- 100 67 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6

dex
Conv. 1 1/60 10000 10000 1000 1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.00 0.000 0.000 0.00000
factor 00 0 0 1 1 01 1

Data type Description Type

2 Integer 8 Int8
3 Integer 16 Int16
4 Integer 32 Int32
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
9 Visible String VisStr
33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2
35 Bit sequence of 16 Boolean variables V2
54 Time difference w/o date TimD

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-61

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
0-** Operation and Display

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion in-
eration dex
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-02 Motor Speed Unit [1] Hz 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-03 Regional Settings [0] International 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-04 Operating State at Power-up [0] Resume All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
[0] As Motor Speed
0-05 Local Mode Unit Unit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Programming Set-up [9] Active Set-up All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
Uint1
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 6
0-14 Readout: Prog. Set-ups / Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-2* LCP Display
Uint1
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1602 All set-ups TRUE - 6
Uint1
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 1614 All set-ups TRUE - 6
Uint1
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 1610 All set-ups TRUE - 6
Uint1
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - 6
Uint1
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1502 All set-ups TRUE - 6
Uint1
0-25 My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 6
0-3* LCP Cust. Readout
0-30 Custom Readout Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-31 Custom Readout Min Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
100.00 CustomReadou-
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value tUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
VisStr
0-37 Display Text 1 ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 [25]
VisStr
0-38 Display Text 2 ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 [25]
VisStr
0-39 Display Text 3 ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 [25]
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

6-62 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type
No. # during op- sion in-
eration dex
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
Access to Main Menu w/o Pass-
0-61 word [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-65 Personal Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
Access to Personal Menu w/o
0-66 Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-7* Clock Settings
Time-
0-70 Set Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 OfDay
0-71 Date Format null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-72 Time Format null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-74 DST/Summertime [0] OFF 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
Time-
0-76 DST/Summertime Start ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 OfDay
Time-
0-77 DST/Summertime End ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 OfDay
0-79 Clock Fault null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-81 Working Days null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
Time-
0-82 Additional Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 OfDay
Time-
0-83 Additional Non-Working Days ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 OfDay
VisStr
0-89 Date and Time Readout 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 [25]

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-63

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
1-** Load / Motor

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. during op- sion index
# eration
1-0* General Settings
1-00 Configuration Mode null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
[3] Auto Energy Op-
1-03 Torque Characteristics tim. VT All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-28 Motor Rotation Check [0] OFF All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
Automatic Motor Adaptation
1-29 (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Addl. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-39 Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-5* Load-Indep. Setting
Motor Magnetization at Zero
1-50 Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Min Speed Normal Magnetizing
1-51 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Min Speed Normal Magnetizing
1-52 [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current 30 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency 200 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-6* Load-Depend. Settg.
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-62 Slip Compensation 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Slip Compensation Time Con-
1-63 stant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Dampening 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Resonance Dampening Time
1-65 Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8

6-64 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type
No. # during op- sion index
eration
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-71 Start Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-73 Flying Start [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Min Speed for Function at Stop
1-81 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Min Speed for Function at Stop
1-82 [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-87 Trip Speed Low [Hz] 0.0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection [4] ETR trip 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
1-93 Thermistor Source [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

2-** Brakes

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. during op- sion index
# eration
2-0* DC Brake
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
2-01 DC Brake Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-02 DC Braking Time 10.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-03 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-04 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-15 Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-16 AC Brake Max. Current 100.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-17 Over-voltage Control [2] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-65

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
3-** Reference / Ramps

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion index
eration
3-0* Reference Limits
3-02 Minimum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-03 Maximum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-04 Reference Function null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
[0] Linked to Hand /
3-13 Reference Site Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog input 53 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-16 Reference 2 Source [20] Digital pot.meter All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-17 Reference 3 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-40 Ramp 1 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-45 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-47 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-5* Ramp 2
3-50 Ramp 2 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp-up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp-down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-55 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-56 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-57 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-84 Initial Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-88 Final Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-9* Digital Pot. meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91 Ramp Time 1.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD

6-66 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
4-** Limits / Warnings

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. during op- sion index
# eration
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction [2] Both directions All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode 110.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0.00 A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ImaxDrive (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
outputSpeedHighLi-
4-53 Warning Speed High mit (P413) All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
-999999.999 Proc-
4-56 Warning Feedback Low essCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
999999.999 Proc-
4-57 Warning Feedback High essCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function [2] Trip 1000 ms All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-62 Bypass Speed to [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-64 Semi-Auto Bypass Set-up [0] OFF All set-ups FALSE - Uint8

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-67

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
5-** Digital In / Out

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion index
eration
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input [14] Jog All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16

6-68 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type
No. # during op- sion index
eration
5-6* Pulse Output
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Var-
5-66 iable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-69

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
6-** Analog In / Out
Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type
No. # during op- sion in-
eration dex
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Fire Mode Live Zero Timeout Func-
6-02 tion [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 53
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 4.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-17 Terminal 53 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-2* Analog Input 54
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 4.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-27 Terminal 54 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-3* Analog Input X30/11
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-37 Term. X30/11 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-4* Analog Input X30/12
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10.00 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-47 Term. X30/12 Live Zero [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-5* Analog Output 42
6-50 Terminal 42 Output null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-6* Analog Output X30/8
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Output Bus Control 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Pre-
6-64 set 0.00 % 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

6-70 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive

8-** Communication and Options

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion index
eration
8-0* General Settings
8-01 Control Site null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-02 Control Source null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Timeout Time ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
8-04 Control Timeout Function [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function [1] Resume set-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-06 Reset Control Timeout [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-09 Communication Charset [0] ISO 8859-1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Control Settings
8-10 Control Profile [0] FC profile 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW [1] Profile Default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 Baud Rate null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits null 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-35 Minimum Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Max Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -5 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
[1] Standard telegram
8-40 Telegram selection 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reverse Select null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-7* BACnet
8-70 BACnet Device Instance 1025 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-72 MS/TP Max Masters 127 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-73 MS/TP Max Info Frames 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
8-74 "Startup I am" [0] Send at power-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
VisStr[
8-75 Initialization Password ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 25]

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-71

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type
No. # during op- sion in-
eration dex
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-82 Slave Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-83 Slave Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-84 Slave Messages Sent 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-85 Slave Timeout Errors 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-88 Reset FC Port Diagnostics [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-89 Diagnostics Count 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int32
8-9* Bus Jog
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 200 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-94 Bus Feedback 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 N2
8-95 Bus Feedback 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 N2
8-96 Bus Feedback 3 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 N2

11-** LonWorks

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change during Conver- Type
No. # operation sion index
11-0* LonWorks ID
11-00 Neuron ID 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[6]
11-01 Domain 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[6]
11-02 Subnet ID 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
11-03 Node ID 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
11-1* LON Functions
11-10 Drive Profile [0] VSD profile All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
11-15 LON Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
11-17 XIF Revision 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[5]
11-18 LonWorks Revision 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 VisStr[5]
11-2* LON Param. Access
11-21 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

6-72 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
13-** Smart Logic Controller

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion in-
eration dex
13-0* SLC Settings
13-00 SL Controller Mode null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-01 Start Event null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-02 Stop Event null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-03 Reset SLC [0] Do not reset SLC All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 TimD
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-52 SL Controller Action null 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-73

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
14-** Special Functions

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion in-
eration dex
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern [0] 60 AVM All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-01 Switching Frequency null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 PWM Random [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Line Failure [0] No function All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-11 Line Voltage at Line Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-2* Reset Functions
14-20 Reset Mode null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-23 Typecode Setting null 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
Current Lim Cont, Proportional
14-30 Gain 100 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
Current Lim Contr, Integration
14-31 Time 0.020 s All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time 26.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
14-4* Energy Optimizing
14-40 VT Level 66 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetization ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency 10 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cos-Phi ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI 1 [1] On 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-6* Auto Derate
14-60 Function at Overtemperature [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-62 Inv. Overload Derate Current 95 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

6-74 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
15-** Adjustable Frequency Drive Information

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion index
eration
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 Input kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-04 Over Temps 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volts 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-08 Number of Starts 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-1* Data Log Settings
15-10 Logging Source 0 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
15-11 Logging Interval ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 TimD
15-12 Trigger Event [0] FALSE 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-22 Historic Log: Time 0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
15-23 Historic Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 TimeOfDay
15-3* Alarm Log
15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-31 Alarm Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Alarm Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-33 Alarm Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 TimeOfDay
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-46 Adj Freq Dr Ordering No. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-48 LCP ID Num. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-51 Adj Freq Dr Serial No. 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
15-59 CSIV Filename ExpressionLimit 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[16]

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-75

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change dur- Conver- Type
No. # ing operation sion index
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-63 Option Serial No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-75 Slot C0 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-76 Option in Slot C1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-77 Slot C1 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-98 Drive Identification 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-99 Parameter Metadata 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16

6-76 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
16-** Data Readouts

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion in-
eration dex
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
0.000 ReferenceFeed-
16-01 Reference [Unit] backUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference % 0.0 % All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0.00 % All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
0.00 CustomReadou-
16-09 Custom Readout tUnit All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Input Power [kW] 0.00 kW All set-ups FALSE 1 Int32
16-11 Input Power [hp] 0.00 hp All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor voltage 0.0 V All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0.0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor Current 0.00 A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0.00 % All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0.0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int32
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0.000 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min 0.000 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
[0] Timed Actions Au-
16-43 Timed Actions Status to All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
16-49 Current Fault Source 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0.0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-52 Feedback [Unit] 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0.00 N/A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int16
16-54 Feedback 1 [Unit] 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-55 Feedback 2 [Unit] 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-56 Feedback 3 [Unit] 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-58 PID Output [%] 0.0 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Int16

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-77

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change dur- Conver- Type
No. # ing opera- sion index
tion
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-64 Analog Input 54 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-66 Digital Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-68 Pulse Input #33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-84 Comm. Option Status 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-95 Ext. Status Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-96 Maintenance Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32

6-78 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
18-** Info & Readouts

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change dur- Conver- Type
No. # ing opera- sion index
tion
18-0* Maintenance Log
18-00 Maintenance Log: Item 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
18-01 Maintenance Log: Action 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
18-02 Maintenance Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
Maintenance Log: Date and Time-
18-03 Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 OfDay
18-1* Fire Mode Log
18-10 Fire Mode Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
18-11 Fire Mode Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
Time-
18-12 Fire Mode Log: Date and Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 OfDay
18-4* PGIO Data Readouts
18-40 Analog Input X49/1 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
18-41 Analog Input X49/3 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
18-42 Analog Input X49/5 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
18-43 Analog Output X49/7 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-44 Analog Output X49/9 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-45 Analog Output X49/11 0.000 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
18-46 X49 Digital Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-79

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
20-** FC Closed-loop

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion index
eration
20-0* Feedback
20-00 Feedback 1 Source [2] Analog input 54 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-01 Feedback 1 Conversion [0] Linear All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
20-02 Feedback 1 Source Unit null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-03 Feedback 2 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-04 Feedback 2 Conversion [0] Linear All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
20-05 Feedback 2 Source Unit null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-06 Feedback 3 Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-07 Feedback 3 Conversion [0] Linear All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
20-08 Feedback 3 Source Unit null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-12 Reference/Feedback Unit null All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-13 Minimum Reference/Feedb. 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
100.000 ProcessCtrlU-
20-14 Maximum Reference/Feedb. nit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-2* Feedback & Setpoint
20-20 Feedback Function [3] Minimum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-21 Setpoint 1 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-22 Setpoint 2 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-23 Setpoint 3 0.000 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-3* Feedbck Adv Conv
20-30 Refrigerant [0] R22 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-31 User-defined Refrigerant A1 10.0000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
20-32 User-defined Refrigerant A2 -2250.00 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
20-33 User-defined Refrigerant A3 250.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
20-7* PID Auto Tuning
20-70 Closed-loop Type [0] Auto 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-71 Tuning Mode [0] Normal 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-72 PID Output Change 0.10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
-999999.000 Proc-
20-73 Minimum Feedback Level essCtrlUnit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
999999.000 Proc-
20-74 Maximum Feedback Level essCtrlUnit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
20-79 PID Auto Tuning [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-8* PID Basic Settings
20-81 PID Normal/ Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-82 PID Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
20-83 PID Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
20-84 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
20-9* PID Controller
20-91 PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
20-93 PID Proportional Gain 0.50 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
20-94 PID Integral Time 20.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
20-95 PID Differentiation Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
20-96 PID Diff. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

6-80 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
21-** Ext. Closed-loop

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion in-
eration dex
21-0* Ext. PID Auto-tuning
21-00 Closed-loop Type [0] Auto 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-01 Tuning Mode [0] Normal 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Uint1
21-02 PID Output Change 0.10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -2 6
21-03 Minimum Feedback Level -999999.000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-04 Maximum Feedback Level 999999.000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-09 PID Auto Tuning [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-1* Ext. CL 1 Ref./Fb.
21-10 Ext. 1 Ref./Feedback Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference 0.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference 100.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint 0.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] 0.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] 0.000 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
21-2* Ext. CL 1 PID
21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Uint1
21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 6
Uint3
21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time 10000.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 2
Uint1
21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 6
Uint1
21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 6
21-3* Ext. CL 2 Ref./Fb.
21-30 Ext. 2 Ref./Feedback Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-31 Ext. 2 Minimum Reference 0.000 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-32 Ext. 2 Maximum Reference 100.000 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-33 Ext. 2 Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-34 Ext. 2 Feedback Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-35 Ext. 2 Setpoint 0.000 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-37 Ext. 2 Reference [Unit] 0.000 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-38 Ext. 2 Feedback [Unit] 0.000 ExtPID2Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-39 Ext. 2 Output [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
21-4* Ext. CL 2 PID
21-40 Ext. 2 Normal/Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Uint1
21-41 Ext. 2 Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 6
Uint3
21-42 Ext. 2 Integral Time 10000.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 2
Uint1
21-43 Ext. 2 Differentation Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 6
Uint1
21-44 Ext. 2 Dif. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 6

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-81

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change Conver- Type
No. # during op- sion in-
eration dex
21-5* Ext. CL 3 Ref./Fb.
21-50 Ext. 3 Ref./Feedback Unit [1] % All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-51 Ext. 3 Minimum Reference 0.000 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-52 Ext. 3 Maximum Reference 100.000 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-53 Ext. 3 Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-54 Ext. 3 Feedback Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-55 Ext. 3 Setpoint 0.000 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-57 Ext. 3 Reference [Unit] 0.000 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-58 Ext. 3 Feedback [Unit] 0.000 ExtPID3Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-59 Ext. 3 Output [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
21-6* Ext. CL 3 PID
21-60 Ext. 3 Normal/Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Uint1
21-61 Ext. 3 Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 6
Uint3
21-62 Ext. 3 Integral Time 10000.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 2
Uint1
21-63 Ext. 3 Differentation Time 0.00 s All set-ups TRUE -2 6
Uint1
21-64 Ext. 3 Dif. Gain Limit 5.0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 6

6-82 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
22-** Application Functions

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change dur- Conver- Type
No. # ing opera- sion index
tion
22-0* Miscellaneous
22-00 External Interlock Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-2* No-Flow Detection
22-22 Low Speed Detection [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-23 No-Flow Function [0] OFF All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-24 No-Flow Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-4* Sleep Mode
22-40 Minimum Run Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-41 Minimum Sleep Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-42 Wake-up Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
22-43 Wake-up Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-44 Wake-up Ref./FB Difference 10 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
22-45 Setpoint Boost 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
22-46 Maximum Boost Time 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-6* Broken Belt Detection
22-60 Broken Belt Function [0] OFF All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
22-61 Broken Belt Torque 10 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
22-62 Broken Belt Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-7* Short Cycle Protection
22-75 Short Cycle Protection [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
start_to_start_min_o
22-76 Interval between Starts n_time (P2277) All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-77 Minimum Run Time 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-83

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
23-** Time-based Functions

Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion index
eration
23-0* Timed Actions
TimeOf-
DayWo-
23-00 ON Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Date
23-01 ON Action [0] DISABLED 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
TimeOf-
DayWo-
23-02 OFF Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Date
23-03 OFF Action [1] No action 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-04 Occurrence [0] All days 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-0* Timed Actions Settings
[0] Timed Actions
23-08 Timed Actions Mode Auto 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-09 Timed Actions Reactivation [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-1* Maintenance
23-10 Maintenance Item [1] Motor bearings 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
23-11 Maintenance Action [1] Lubricate 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
23-12 Maintenance Time Base [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
23-13 Maintenance Time Interval 1h 1 set-up TRUE 74 Uint32
TimeOf-
23-14 Maintenance Date and Time ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Day
23-1* Maintenance Reset
23-15 Reset Maintenance Word [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
VisStr[2
23-16 Maintenance Text 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 0]
23-5* Energy Log
23-50 Energy Log Resolution [5] Last 24 Hours 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
TimeOf-
23-51 Period Start ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Day
23-53 Energy Log 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-54 Reset Energy Log [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

6-84 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Par. Parameter description Default value 4 set-up Change dur- Conver- Type
No. # ing opera- sion index
tion
23-6* Trending
23-60 Trend Variable [0] Power [kW] 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-61 Continuous Bin Data 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-62 Timed Bin Data 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Time-
23-63 Timed Period Start ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 OfDay
Time-
23-64 Timed Period Stop ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 OfDay
23-65 Minimum Bin Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
23-66 Reset Continuous Bin Data [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-67 Reset Timed Bin Data [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
23-8* Payback Counter
23-80 Power Reference Factor 100 % 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
23-81 Energy Cost 1.00 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
23-82 Investment 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
23-83 Energy Savings 0 kWh All set-ups TRUE 75 Int32
23-84 Cost Savings 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32

24-** Application Functions 2

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change Conver- Type

No. # during op- sion index
eration
24-0* Fire Mode
24-00 Fire Mode Function [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-03 Fire Mode Min Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
24-04 Fire Mode Max Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
24-05 Fire Mode Preset Reference 0.00 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
24-06 Fire Mode Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
[1] Trip at Critical
24-09 Fire Mode Alarm Handling Alarms 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
24-1* Drive Bypass
24-10 Bypass Function [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
24-11 Bypass Delay Time 0s 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-85

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive
Dedicated factory settings
Adjustable frequency drives delivered as part of a Trane equipment can have dedicated factory settings. Upon
factory reset of the adjustable frequency drive, these parameter settings will be used as default. See below for
details on the specific equipment settings.

Trane IntelliPak™, IntelliPak™ II, and Voyager III™

Par. No. # Parameter description Trane default value
0-01 Language [22] English US
0-03 Regional Unit Settings [1] North America
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small [1662] Analog Input 53
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small [1611] Power [hp]
0-40 Hand Start Button [0] Disabled
1-03 Torque Characteristics [1] Variable
1-21 Motor Power [HP] Reference Motor Nameplate HP
1-22 Motor Voltage Reference Motor Nameplate Voltage
1-24 Motor Current Reference Motor Nameplate FLA
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed Reference Motor Nameplate Rated Speed
1-73 Flying Start [1] Enabled
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current 0%
2-01 DC Brake Current 0%
2-04 DC Brake Cut-in Speed [Hz] 10Hz
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time 30 sec
3-42 Ramp-down Time 30 sec
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 22 Hz IntelliPak
35 Hz Voyager lll
4-18 Current Limit 100%
5-12 Terminal 27, Digital Input [2] Coast Inverse
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 22 Hz IntelliPak
35 Hz Voyager lll
14-01 Switching Frequency 208/203V, 30 Hp and below 8kHz, above 5 kHz
460/575V, 60 Hp and below 8 kHz, above 5 kHz
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [3] Derate
14-20 Reset Mode [3] Automatic reset x 3
14-60 Function at Overtemperature [Derate]
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload [Derate]

6-86 TR200 Instruction Manual

 How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive

Trane M-Series and T-Series Climate Changer™, Performance Climate Changer™ - Indoor & Outdoor
Par. No. # Parameter description Trane default value
0-03 Regional Unit Settings [1] North America
1-21 Motor Power [HP] Reference Motor Nameplate HP
1-22 Motor Voltage Reference Motor Nameplate Voltage
1-24 Motor Current Reference Motor Nameplate FLA
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed Reference Motor Nameplate Rated Speed
1-73 Flying Start [Enabled]
3-03 Maximum Reference 60 Hz or (for direct drive) Set for Application
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time 30 sec
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time 30 sec
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 20 Hz
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] 60 Hz or (for direct drive) Set for Application
4-18 Current Limit Maximum Value
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [2] Coast Inverse
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 20 Hz
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value 60 Hz or (for direct drive) Set for Application
14-01 Switching Frequency 208/203V, 30 Hp and below 8kHz, above 5 kHz
460/575V, 60 Hp and below 8 kHz, above 5 kHz

Trane Commercial Self Contained and Packaged Climate Changer™

Par. No. # Parameter description Trane default value
0-01 Language [22] English US
0-03 Regional Settings [1] North America
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small [1611] Power [HP]
1-21 Motor Power [HP] Reference Motor Nameplate HP
1-22 Motor Voltage Reference Motor Nameplate Voltage
1-24 Motor Current Reference Motor Nameplate FLA
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed Reference Motor Nameplate Rated Speed
1-73 Flying Start [1] Enabled
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time 30 sec
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time 30 sec
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 22 Hz
5-12 Terminal 27, Digital Input [0] No operation, Packaged Climate Changer
[2] Coast Inverse, Commercial Self Contained
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref. / Feedb. Value 22 Hz
14-01 Switching Frequency 8 kHz
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [3] Derate
14-60 Function at Overtemperature [1] Derate
14-21 Automatic Restart Time 3 sec

TR200 Instruction Manual 6-87

How to Program the Adjustable Frequency
Drive

6-88 TR200 Instruction Manual

Troubleshooting
Alarms and Warnings
A warning or an alarm is signaled by the relevant LED on the front of the adjustable frequency drive and indicated
by a code on the display.

A warning remains active until its cause is no longer present. Under certain circumstances operation of the
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be critical, but are not necessarily so.

In the event of an alarm, the adjustable frequency drive will have tripped. Alarms must be reset to restart op-
eration once their cause has been rectified.
This may be done in four ways:
1. By using the [RESET] control button on the keypad.
2. Via a digital input with the “Reset” function.
3. Via serial communication/optional serial communication bus.
4. By resetting automatically using the [Auto Reset] function, which is a default setting for TR200 Drive, see
par.14-20 Reset Mode in the TR200 Programming Guide

Note: After a manual reset using the [RESET] button on the keypad, the [AUTO ON] or [HAND ON] button must
be pressed to restart the motor.

If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
(see also table on following page).

Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection, means that the line power supply must be switched off
before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back on, the adjustable frequency drive is no longer blocked
and may be reset as described above, once the cause has been rectified.
Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the automatic reset function in par.14-20 Reset Mode

CAUTION
Automatic wake-up is possible!
Could result in equipment or property damage.

If a warning and alarm is marked against a code in the table on the following page, this means that either a
warning occurs before an alarm, or it can be specified whether it is a warning or an alarm that is to be displayed
for a given fault.
This is possible, for instance, in par.1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries on
coasting, and the alarm and warning flash on the adjustable frequency drive. Once the problem has been rec-
tified, only the alarm continues flashing.

TR200 Instruction Manual 7-1

Troubleshooting

No. Description Warning Alarm/ Alarm/Trip Parameter Reference

Trip Lock
1 10 Volts low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) 6-01
3 No motor (X) 1-80
4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) 14-12
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC overvoltage X X
8 DC undervoltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90
11 Motor thermistor overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90
12 Torque limit X X
13 Overcurrent X X X
14 Ground fault X X X
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short Circuit X X
17 Control word timeout (X) (X) 8-04
23 Internal Fan Fault X
24 External Fan Fault X 14-53
25 Brake resistor short-circuited X
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) 2-13
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28 Brake check (X) (X) 2-15
29 Drive overtemperature X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58
33 Inrush fault X X
34 Fieldbus communication fault X X
35 Out of frequency ranges X X
36 Mains failure X X
37 Phase Imbalance X X
38 Internal fault X X
39 Heatsink sensor X X
40 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27 (X) 5-01
41 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29 (X) 5-02
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/6 (X) 5-32
42 Overload of Digital Output On X30/7 (X) 5-33
46 Pwr.card sup X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X (X) 1-86
50 AMA calibration failed X
51 AMA check Unom and Inom X
52 AMA low Inom X
53 AMA motor too big X
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA Parameter out of range X
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA timeout X
58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X

Table 7. 1: Alarm/Warning code list

7-2 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Troubleshooting

No. Description Warn- Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter Refer-

ing ence
60 External Interlock X
62 Output Frequency at Maximum Limit X
64 Voltage Limit X
65 Control Board Overtemperature X X X
66 Heatsink Temperature Low X
67 Option Configuration has Changed X
69 Pwr. Card Temp X X
70 Illegal FC configuration X
72 Dang. failure X1)
76 Power Unit Set-up X
79 Ill. PS config X X
80 Drive Initialized to Default Value X
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X
92 NoFlow X X 22-2*
93 Dry Pump X X 22-2*
94 End of Curve X X 22-5*
95 Broken Belt X X 22-6*
96 Start Delayed X 22-7*
97 Stop Delayed X 22-7*
98 Clock Fault X 0-7*
201 Fire M was Active
202 Fire M Limits Exceeded
203 Missing Motor
204 Locked Rotor
243 Brake IGBT X X
244 Heatsink temp X X X
245 Heatsink sensor X X
246 Pwr.card sup X X
247 Pwr.card temp X X
248 Illegal PS config X X
250 New spare parts X
251 Type Code X X

Table 7. 2: Alarm/Warning code list

(X) Dependent on parameter 1) Cannot be auto reset via par.14-20 Reset Mode
A trip is the action when an alarm has appeared. The trip will coast the motor and can be reset by pressing the
reset button or make a reset by a digital input (parameter group 5-1* [1]). The original event that caused an
alarm cannot damage the adjustable frequency drive or cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an action that

TR200 Instruction Manual 7-3

Troubleshooting

occurs in conjunction with an alarm, which may cause damage to the adjustable frequency drive or connected
parts. A trip lock situation can only be reset by power cycling.

LED indication
Warning yellow
Alarm flashing red
Trip locked yellow and red

Table 7. 3: LED Indication

Alarm Word and Extended Status Word

Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Warning Word Extended Status Word
0 00000001 1 Brake Check Brake Check Ramping
1 00000002 2 Pwr. Card Temp Pwr. Card Temp AMA Running
2 00000004 4 Ground Fault Ground Fault Start CW/CCW
3 00000008 8 Ctrl.Card Temp Ctrl.Card Temp Slow Down
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. Word TO Ctrl. Word TO Catch Up
5 00000020 32 Overcurrent Overcurrent Feedback High
6 00000040 64 Torque Limit Torque Limit Feedback Low
7 00000080 128 Motor Th Over Motor Th Over Output Current High
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR Over Motor ETR Over Output Current Low
9 00000200 512 Inverter Overld. Inverter Overld. Output Freq High
10 00000400 1024 DC undervolt DC undervolt Output Freq Low
11 00000800 2048 DC overvolt DC overvolt Brake Check OK
12 00001000 4096 Short Circuit DC Voltage Low Braking Max
13 00002000 8192 Inrush Fault DC Voltage High Braking
14 00004000 16384 Mains ph. Loss Mains ph. Loss Out of Speed Range
15 00008000 32768 AMA Not OK No Motor OVC Active
16 00010000 65536 Live Zero Error Live Zero Error
17 00020000 131072 Internal Fault 10V low
18 00040000 262144 Brake Overload Brake Overload
19 00080000 524288 U phase Loss Brake Resistor
20 00100000 1048576 V phase Loss Brake IGBT
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss Speed Limit
22 00400000 4194304 Fieldbus Fault Fieldbus Fault
23 00800000 8388608 24 V Supply Low 24V Supply Low
24 01000000 16777216 Mains Failure Mains Failure
25 02000000 33554432 1.8 V Supply Low Current Limit
26 04000000 67108864 Brake Resistor Low Temp
27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT Voltage Limit
28 10000000 268435456 Option Change Unused
29 20000000 536870912 Drive Initialized Unused

Table 7. 4: Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word

The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional serial
communication bus for diagnosis. See also par.16-90 Alarm Word, par.16-92 Warning Word and par.16-94 Ext.
Status Word.

7-4 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Troubleshooting

Fault Messages

WARNING
Hazardous Service Procedures!
The maintenance and troubleshooting procedures recommended in this section of the manual could result in exposure
to electrical, mechanical or other potential safety hazards. Always refer to the safety warnings provided throughout this
manual concerning these procedures. Unless specified otherwise, disconnect all electrical power including remote
disconnect and discharge all energy storing devices such as capacitors before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently energized. When necessary to work with live electrical com-
ponents, have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been trained in handling live electrical com-
ponents perform these tasks. Failure to follow all of the recommended safety warnings provided, could result in death
or serious injury.

WARNING 1, 10 volts low fault in the input rectifier on the adjustable frequency
The control card voltage is below 10 V from terminal drive. Options are programmed at par.14-12 Function
50. at Mains Imbalance.
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10
V supply is overloaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590
Ω. WARNING
Live Electrical Components!
This condition can be caused by a short in a connec-
ted potentiometer or improper wiring of the potenti- Troubleshooting: Check the supply voltage and sup-
ometer. ply currents to the adjustable frequency drive.

WARNING 5, DC link voltage high

WARNING
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than
Live Electrical Components!
the high voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent
on the drive voltage rating. The adjustable frequency
Troubleshooting: Remove the wiring from terminal drive is still active.
50. If the warning clears, the problem is with the cus-
tomer wiring. If the warning does not clear, replace WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
the control card. The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the
low voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on
WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error the drive voltage rating. The adjustable frequency
drive is still active.
This warning or alarm will only appear if program-
med by the user in par.6-01 Live Zero Timeout Func- WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
tion. The signal on one of the analog inputs is less If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit,
than 50% of the minimum value programmed for that the adjustable frequency drive trips after a time.
input. This condition can be caused by broken wiring
Troubleshooting:
or faulty device sending the signal.
Extend the ramp time
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor
Change the ramp type
No motor has been connected to the output of the
Activate functions in par.2-10 Brake Function
adjustable frequency drive. This warning or alarm
will only appear if programmed by the user in par. Increase par.14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
1-80 Function at Stop.
WARNING/ALARM 8, DC undervoltage
Troubleshooting: Check the connection between the If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC) drops below
drive and the motor. the undervoltage limit, the adjustable frequency
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss A phase is drive checks if a 24 V backup supply is connected. If
missing on the supply side, or the AC line voltage im- no 24 V backup supply is connected, the adjustable
balance is too high. This message also appears for a frequency drive trips after a fixed time delay. The time
delay varies with unit size.

TR200 Instruction Manual 7-5

Troubleshooting

Check that the thermistor is connected correctly

WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overloaded
between terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input)
The adjustable frequency drive is about to cut out be- and terminal 50 (+10 V supply), or between ter-
cause of an overload (too high current for too long). minal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only) and ter-
The counter for electronic, thermal inverter protec- minal 50.
tion gives a warning at 98% and trips at 100%, while
giving an alarm. The adjustable frequency drive can- If a KTY sensor is used, check for correct connec-
not be reset until the counter is below 90%. tion between terminal 54 and 55.
The fault is that the adjustable frequency drive is If using a thermal switch or thermistor, check the
overloaded by more than 100% for too long. NOTE: programming of par.1-93 Thermistor Source
See the derating section in the Design Guide for more matches sensor wiring.
details if a high switching frequency is required.
If using a KTY sensor, check the programming of
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature parameters 1-95, 1-96, and 1-97 match sensor
According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), wiring.
the motor is too hot. Select whether the adjustable
frequency drive gives a warning or an alarm when the
counter reaches 100% in par.1-90 Motor Thermal Pro- WARNING
tection. The fault is that the motor is overloaded by Disconnect power before proceeding.
more than 100% for too long.
Troubleshooting:
This fault may be caused by shock loading or fast
WARNING
acceleration with high inertia loads.
Live Electrical Components!
Turn off the adjustable frequency drive. Check if
the motor shaft can be turned.
Troubleshooting:
Check if the motor is overheating. Make sure that the motor size matches the ad-
justable frequency drive.
If the motor is mechanically overloaded
Incorrect motor data in parameters 1-20 through
That the motor par.1-24 Motor Current is set cor-
1-25.
rectly.
Motor data in parameters 1-20 through 1-25 are ALARM 14, Ground fault
set correctly. There is a discharge from the output phases to
The setting in par.1-91 Motor External Fan. ground, either in the cable between the adjustable
frequency drive and the motor or in the motor itself.
Run AMA in par.1-29 Automatic Motor Adapta-
tion (AMA).
WARNING
WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor overtemp Disconnect power before proceeding.
The thermistor or the thermistor connection is dis-
connected. Select whether the adjustable frequency
Troubleshooting:
drive gives a warning or an alarm when the counter
Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and re-
reaches 100% in par.1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.
move the ground fault.
Measure the resistance to ground of the motor
WARNING leads and the motor with a megohmmeter to
Live Electrical Components! check for ground faults in the motor.
Perform current sensor test.
Troubleshooting:
Check if the motor is overheating.
Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.

7-6 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Troubleshooting

WARNING 23, Internal fan fault

ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
The fan warning function is an extra protection func-
A fitted option is not operational with the present tion that checks if the fan is running / mounted. The
control board hardware or software. fan warning can be disabled in par.14-53 Fan Moni-
Record the value of the following parameters and tor ([0] Disabled).
contact your Trane supplier:
Par.15-40 FC Type For the D, E, and F Frame drives, the regulated volt-
age to the fans is monitored.
Par.15-41 Power Section
Par.15-42 Voltage
WARNING
Par.15-43 Software Version
Disconnect power before proceeding.
Par.15-45 Actual Typecode String
Par.15-49 SW ID Control Card Troubleshooting:
Par.15-50 SW ID Power Card Check fan resistance.

Par.15-60 Option Mounted Check soft charge fuses.

Par.15-61 Option SW Version

WARNING 24, External fan fault
ALARM 16, Short circuit
The fan warning function is an extra protection func-
There is short-circuiting in the motor or on the motor
tion that checks if the fan is running / mounted. The
terminals.
fan warning can be disabled in par.14-53 Fan Moni-
tor ([0] Disabled).
WARNING For the D, E, and F Frame drives, the regulated volt-
Disconnect power before proceeding. age to the fans is monitored.
Troubleshooting:
Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and remove Check fan resistance.
the short-circuit.
Check soft charge fuses.

WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
There is no communication to the adjustable frequen- Brake resistor fault: the brake resistor is not connec-
cy drive. ted or not working.
The warning will only be active when par.8-04 Control Check par.2-15 Brake Check.
Timeout Function is NOT set to OFF. ALARM 29, Heatsink temp
If par.8-04 Control Timeout Function is set to Stop and The maximum temperature of the heatsink has been
Trip, a warning appears and the adjustable frequency exceeded. The temperature fault will not be reset un-
drive ramps down until it trips, while giving an alarm. til the temperature falls below a defined heatsink
temperature. The trip and reset point are different
based on the drive power size.
WARNING
Live Electrical Components!
Troubleshooting:
Ambient temperature too high.
Troubleshooting:
Check connections on the serial communication Too long motor cable.
cable. Incorrect clearance above and below the drive.
Increase par.8-03 Control Timeout Time Dirty heatsink.
Check the operation of the communication Blocked air flow around the drive.
equipment.
Damaged heatsink fan.
Verify proper installation based on EMC require-
ments.

TR200 Instruction Manual 7-7

Troubleshooting

For the D, E, and F Frame drives, this alarm is based

WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communica-
on the temperature measured by the heatsink sensor
tion fault
mounted inside the IGBT modules. For the F Frame
drives, this alarm can also be caused by the thermal The fieldbus on the communication option card is not
sensor in the rectifier module. working.
WARNING/ALARM 35, Out of frequency
range:
WARNING
This warning is active if the output frequency has
Disconnect power before proceeding.
reached the high limit (set in par. 4-53) or low limit
(set in par. 4-52). In Process Control, Closed-loop (par.
Troubleshooting: 1-00) this warning is displayed.
Check fan resistance.
WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure
Check soft charge fuses.
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage
IGBT thermal sensor. to the adjustable frequency drive is lost and par.
14-10 Line Failure is NOT set to OFF. Check the fuses
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing to the adjustable frequency drive.
Motor phase U between the adjustable frequency
ALARM 38, Internal fault
drive and the motor is missing.
It may be necessary to contact your Trane supplier.
Some typical alarm messages:
WARNING
Disconnect power before proceeding.

Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and check

motor phase U.

ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing

Motor phase V between the adjustable frequency
drive and the motor is missing.

WARNING
Disconnect power before proceeding.

Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and check

motor phase V.

ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing

Motor phase W between the adjustable frequency
drive and the motor is missing.

WARNING
Disconnect power before proceeding.

Turn off the adjustable frequency drive and check

motor phase W.

ALARM 33, Inrush fault

Too many power-ups have occurred within a short
time period. Let unit cool to operating temperature.

7-8 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Troubleshooting

0 Serial port cannot be initialized. Serious 2304 Could not read any data from power EE-
hardware failure PROM
256-25 Power EEPROM data is defect or too old 2305 Missing SW version from power unit
8 2314 Missing power unit data from power
512 Control board EEPROM data is defect or unit
too old 2315 Missing SW version from power unit
513 Communication time out reading EE- 2316 Missing io_statepage from power unit
PROM data 2324 Power card configuration is determined
514 Communication time out reading EE- to be incorrect at power-up
PROM data 2330 Power size information between the
515 Application Orientated Control cannot power cards does not match
recognize the EEPROM data 2561 No communication from DSP to ATACD
516 Cannot write to the EEPROM because a 2562 No communication from ATACD to DSP
write command is on progress (state running)
517 Write command is under time out 2816 Stack overflow Control board module
518 Failure in the EEPROM 2817 Scheduler slow tasks
519 Missing or invalid Barcode data in EE- 2818 Fast tasks
PROM 2819 Parameter thread
783 Parameter value outside of min/max lim- 2820 keypad Stack overflow
its 2821 Serial port overflow
1024- A CAN message that has to be sent, 2822 USB port overflow
1279 couldn't be sent 2836 cfListMempool to small
1281 Digital Signal Processor flash timeout 3072-51 Parameter value is outside its limits
1282 Power micro software version mismatch 22
1283 Power EEPROM data version mismatch 5123 Option in slot A: Hardware incompati-
1284 Cannot read Digital Signal Processor ble with Control board hardware
software version 5124 Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible
1299 Option SW in slot A is too old with Control board hardware
1300 Option SW in slot B is too old 5125 Option in slot C0: Hardware incompati-
1302 Option SW in slot C1 is too old ble with Control board hardware
1315 Option SW in slot A is not supported (not 5126 Option in slot C1: Hardware incompati-
allowed) ble with Control board hardware
1316 Option SW in slot B is not supported (not 5376-62 Out of memory
allowed) 31
1318 Option SW in slot C1 is not supported
(not allowed)
1379 Option A did not respond when calculat-
ing Platform Version.
1380 Option B did not respond when calculat-
ing Platform Version.
1536 An exception in the Application Orienta-
ted Control is registered. Debug infor-
mation written in keypad
1792 DSP watchdog is active. Debugging of
power part data Motor Orientated Con-
trol data not transferred correctly
2049 Power data restarted
2064-2 H081x: option in slot x has restarted
072
2080-2 H082x: option in slot x has issued a pow-
088 er-up wait
2096-2 H083x: option in slot x has issued a legal
104 power-up wait

TR200 Instruction Manual 7-9

Troubleshooting

ALARM 39, Heatsink sensor ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom
No feedback from the heatsink temperature sensor. The setting of the motor voltage, motor current, and
motor power is presumably wrong. Check the set-
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not avail-
tings.
able on the power card. The problem could be on the
power card, on the gate drive card, or the ribbon ca- ALARM 52, AMA low Inom
ble between the power card and gate drive card. The motor current is too low. Check the settings.
WARNING 40, Overload of Digital Output Ter- ALARM 53, AMA big motor
minal 27
The motor is too big for the AMA to be carried out.
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove
short-circuit connection. Check par.5-01 Terminal 27 ALARM 54, AMA small motor
Mode. The motor is too big for the AMA to be carried out.
WARNING 41, Overload of Digital Output Ter- ALARM 55, AMA Parameter out of range
minal 29 The parameter values found from the motor are out-
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove side acceptable range.
short-circuit connection. Check par.5-02 Terminal 29
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user
Mode.
The AMA has been interrupted by the user.
WARNING 42, Overload of Digital Output on
X30/6 or Overload of Digital Output on X30/7 ALARM 57, AMA timeout
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or re- Try to start the AMA again a number of times, until
move short-circuit connection. Check par.5-32 Term the AMA is carried out. Please note that repeated runs
X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101). may heat the motor to a level where the resistances
Rs and Rr are increased. In most cases, however, this
For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or re-
is not critical.
move short-circuit connection. Check par.5-33 Term
X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101). ALARM 58, AMA internal fault
ALARM 46, Power card supply Contact your Trane supplier.

The supply on the power card is out of range. WARNING 59, Current limit
There are three power supplies generated by the The current is higher than the value in par.4-18 Cur-
switch mode power supply (SMPS) on the power rent Limit.
card: 24 V, 5 V, +/-18 V. When powered with three- WARNING 60, External interlock
phase AC line voltage, all three supplied are moni-
External interlock has been activated. To resume nor-
tored.
mal operation, apply 24 Vdc to the terminal program-
WARNING 47, 24 V supply low med for external interlock and reset the adjustable
The 24 Vdc is measured on the control card. frequency drive (via serial communication, digital I/
O, or by pressing reset button on keypad).
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low
WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum
The 1.8 Vdc supply used on the control card is outside
limit
of allowable limits. The power supply is measured on
the control card. The output frequency is higher than the value set in
par.4-19 Max Output Frequency
WARNING 49, Speed limit
WARNING 64, Voltage limit
When the speed is not within the specified range in
par. 4-11 and par. 4-13, the drive will show a warning. The load and speed combination demands a motor
When the speed is below the specified limit in par. voltage higher than the actual DC link voltage.
1-86 Trip Speed Low [RPM] (except when starting or WARNING/ALARM/TRIP 65, Control card
stopping), the drive will trip. overtemperature
ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed Control card overtemperature: The cutout tempera-
Contact your Trane supplier. ture of the control card is 176°F [80°C].

7-10 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Troubleshooting

WARNING 66, Heatsink temperature low ALARM 93, Dry pump

This warning is based on the temperature sensor in A no-flow situation and high speed indicates that the
the IGBT module. pump has run dry. See parameter group 22-2.
Troubleshooting: ALARM 94, End of curve
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has Feedback stays lower than the setpoint which may
changed indicate leakage in the pipe system.
One or more options have either been added or re- ALARM 95, Broken belt
moved since the last power-down. Torque is below the torque level set for no load, in-
ALARM 69, Power card temperature dicating a broken belt. See parameter group 22-6.
The temperature sensor on the power card is either ALARM 96, Start delayed
too hot or too cold. Motor start has been delayed due to short-cycle pro-
Troubleshooting: tection active. See parameter group 22-7.
Check the operation of the door fans.
WARNING 97, Stop delayed
Make sure that the filters for the door fans are not Stopping the motor has been delayed due to short
blocked. cycle protection is active. See parameter group 22-7.
Check that the connector plate is properly instal- WARNING 98, Clock fault
led on IP 21 and IP 54 (NEMA 1 and NEMA 12)
Clock Fault. Time is not set or RTC clock (if mounted)
drives.
has failed. See parameter group 0-7.
ALARM 70, Illegal FC Configuration
WARNING 201, Fire Mode was Active
The current control board and power board combi-
Fire mode has been active.
nation is illegal.
WARNING 76, Power Unit Set-up WARNING 202, Fire Mode Limits Exceeded
Fire mode has suppressed one or more warranty
The required number of power units does not match
voiding alarms.
the detected number of active power units.
WARNING 77, Reduced power mode: WARNING 203, Missing Motor
A multi-motor underload situation was detected, this
This warning indicates that the drive is operating in
could be due to, for example, a missing motor.
reduced power mode (i.e., less than the allowed num-
ber of inverter sections). This warning will be gener- WARNING 204, Locked Rotor
ated on power cycle when the drive is set to run with A multi-motor overload situation was detected,
fewer inverters and will remain on. which could be due to, e.g., a locked rotor.
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration ALARM 244, Heatsink temperature
The scaling card is the incorrect part number or not This alarm is only for F Frame drives. It is equivalent
installed. Also MK102 connector on the power card to Alarm 29. The report value in the alarm log indi-
could not be installed. cates which power module generated the alarm:
ALARM 80, Drive initialized to default value 1 = left most inverter module.
Parameter settings are initialized to default settings
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
after a manual reset.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 drive.
ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage
input) when a KTY sensor is connected to analog in- 5 = rectifier module.
put terminal 54.
ALARM 92, No-flow
A no-load situation has been detected in the system.
See parameter group 22-2.

TR200 Instruction Manual 7-11

Troubleshooting

ALARM 245, Heatsink sensor ALARM 248, Illegal power section configura-
This alarm is only for F Frame drives. It is equivalent tion
to Alarm 39. The report value in the alarm log indi- This alarm is only for F Frame drives. It is equivalent
cates which power module generated the alarm: to Alarm 79. The report value in the alarm log indi-
cates which power module generated the alarm:
1 = left most inverter module.
1 = left most inverter module.
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 drive.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 drive.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
5 = rectifier module.
5 = rectifier module.
ALARM 246, Power card supply
This alarm is only for F Frame drives. It is equivalent ALARM 250, New spare part
to Alarm 46. The report value in the alarm log indi- The power or switch mode power supply has been
cates which power module generated the alarm: exchanged. The adjustable frequency drive type code
must be restored in the EEPROM. Select the correct
1 = left most inverter module.
type code in par.14-23 Typecode Setting according to
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 drive. the label on the unit. Remember to select ‘Save to
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 drive. EEPROM’ to complete.

3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 drive. ALARM 251, New type code

5 = rectifier module. The adjustable frequency drive has a new type code.

ALARM 247, Power card temperature

This alarm is only for F Frame drives. It is equivalent
to Alarm 69. The report value in the alarm log indi-
cates which power module generated the alarm:
1 = left most inverter module.
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 drive.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 drive.
5 = rectifier module.

Acoustic Noise or Vibration

If the motor or the equipment driven by the motor, e.g., a fan blade, is making noise or vibrations at certain
frequencies, try the following:
• Speed Bypass, parameter group 4-6*
• Overmodulation, par.14-03 Overmodulation set to off
• Switching pattern and frequency parameter group 14-0*
• Resonance Dampening, par.1-64 Resonance Dampening

7-12 TR200 Instruction Manual

Specifications
General Specifications

Line power supply 200–240 VAC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
Adjustable frequency drive P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P3K7
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3.7
IP 20 / Chassis
(A2+A3 may be converted to IP21 using a conver-
sion kit. (Please see also items Mechanical mount- A2 A2 A2 A3 A3
ing in the Instruction Manual and IP 21/Type 1 En-
closure kit in the Design Guide.))
IP 55 / NEMA 12 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
IP 66 / NEMA 12 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 208 V 1.5 2.0 2.9 4.0 4.9
Output current
Continuous
6.6 7.5 10.6 12.5 16.7
(3 x 200–240 V) [A]
Intermittent
7.3 8.3 11.7 13.8 18.4
(3 x 200–240 V) [A]
Continuous
2.38 2.70 3.82 4.50 6.00
kVA (208 V AC) [kVA]
Max. cable size:
(line power, motor, brake)
4/10
[mm2 /AWG] 2)
Max. input current
Continuous
5.9 6.8 9.5 11.3 15.0
(3 x 200–240 V) [A]
Intermittent
6.5 7.5 10.5 12.4 16.5
(3 x 200–240 V) [A]
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 20 20 20 32 32
Environment
Estimated power loss
63 82 116 155 185
at rated max. load [W] 4)
Weight enclosure IP20
4.9 4.9 4.9 6.6 6.6
[kg]
Weight enclosure IP21
5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5
[kg]
Weight enclosure IP55
13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
[kg]
Weight enclosure IP 66
13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
[kg]
Efficiency 3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96

Table 8. 1: Line Power Supply 200–240 V AC

TR200 Instruction Manual 8-1

8-2
Line power supply 3 x 200–240 VAC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
IP 20 / Chassis
(B3+4 and C3+4 may be converted to IP21 using a conversion kit. (Please
B3 B3 B3 B4 B4 C3 C3 C4 C4
see also items Mechanical mounting in the Instruction Manual and IP 21/
Type 1 Enclosure kit in the Design Guide.))
Specifications

IP 21 / NEMA 1 B1 B1 B1 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
IP 55 / NEMA 12 B1 B1 B1 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
IP 66 / NEMA 12 B1 B1 B1 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
Adjustable frequency drive P5K5 P7K5 P11K P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K P45K
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 208 V 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
Output current
Continuous
24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88.0 115 143 170
(3 x 200–240 V) [A]
Intermittent
26.6 33.9 50.8 65.3 82.3 96.8 127 157 187
(3 x 200–240 V) [A]
Continuous
8.7 11.1 16.6 21.4 26.9 31.7 41.4 51.5 61.2
kVA (208 V AC) [kVA]
Max. cable size:
(line power, motor, brake) 50/1/0 120/250
10/7 35/2 95/4/0
[mm2 /AWG] 2) (B4=35/2) MCM
With line power disconnect switch included: 185/
16/6 35/2 35/2 70/3/0 kcmil35
0
Max. input current
Continuous
22.0 28.0 42.0 54.0 68.0 80.0 104.0 130.0 154.0
(3 x 200–240 V) [A]
Intermittent
24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8 88.0 114.0 143.0 169.0
(3 x 200–240 V) [A]
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 63 63 63 80 125 125 160 200 250
Environment:
Estimated power loss
269 310 447 602 737 845 1140 1353 1636
at rated max. load [W] 4)
Weight enclosure IP20 [kg] 12 12 12 23.5 23.5 35 35 50 50
Weight enclosure IP21 [kg] 23 23 23 27 45 45 45 65 65
Weight enclosure IP55 [kg] 23 23 23 27 45 45 45 65 65
Weight enclosure IP 66 [kg] 23 23 23 27 45 45 45 65 65

TR200 Instruction Manual

Efficiency 3) 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97

Table 8. 2: Line Power Supply 3 x 200–240 V AC

 Line Power Supply 3 x 380–480 V AC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
Adjustable frequency drive P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 460 V 1.5 2.0 2.9 4.0 5.0 7.5 10
IP 20 / Chassis
(A2+A3 may be converted to IP21 using a conversion kit. (Please see also
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3
items Mechanical mounting in the Instruction Manual and IP 21/Type 1
Enclosure kit in the Design Guide.))

TR200 Instruction Manual

IP 55 / NEMA 12 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
IP 66 / NEMA 12 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5
Output current
Continuous (3 x 380–440 V) [A] 3 4.1 5.6 7.2 10 13 16
Intermittent (3 x 380–440 V) [A] 3.3 4.5 6.2 7.9 11 14.3 17.6
Continuous (3 x 441–480 V) [A] 2.7 3.4 4.8 6.3 8.2 11 14.5
Intermittent (3 x 441–480 V) [A] 3.0 3.7 5.3 6.9 9.0 12.1 15.4
Continuous kVA (400 V AC) [kVA] 2.1 2.8 3.9 5.0 6.9 9.0 11.0
Continuous kVA (460 V AC) [kVA] 2.4 2.7 3.8 5.0 6.5 8.8 11.6
Max. cable size:
(line power, motor, brake)
4/10
[[mm2/ AWG] 2)
Max. input current
Continuous
2.7 3.7 5.0 6.5 9.0 11.7 14.4
(3 x 380–440 V) [A]
Intermittent
3.0 4.1 5.5 7.2 9.9 12.9 15.8
(3 x 380–440 V) [A]
Continuous
2.7 3.1 4.3 5.7 7.4 9.9 13.0
(3 x 441–480 V) [A]
Intermittent
3.0 3.4 4.7 6.3 8.1 10.9 14.3
(3 x 441–480 V) [A]
Max. pre-fuses1)[A] 10 10 20 20 20 32 32
Environment
Estimated power loss
58 62 88 116 124 187 255
at rated max. load [W] 4)
Weight enclosure IP20 [kg] 4.8 4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9 6.6 6.6
Weight enclosure IP 21 [kg]
Weight enclosure IP 55 [kg] 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 14.2 14.2
Weight enclosure IP 66 [kg] 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 14.2 14.2

8-3
Specifications

Efficiency 3) 0.96 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97

Table 8. 3: Line Power Supply 3 x 380–480 V AC

8-4
Line Power Supply 3 x 380–480 V AC - Normal overload 110% for 1 minute
Adjustable frequency drive P11K P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K P45K P55K P75K P90K
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Typical Shaft Output [HP] at 460 V 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
IP 20 / Chassis
Specifications

(B3+4 and C3+4 may be converted to IP21 using a con- B3 B3 B3 B4 B4 B4 C3 C3 C4 C4

version kit (Please contact Trane)
IP 21 / NEMA 1 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
IP 55 / NEMA 12 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
IP 66 / NEMA 12 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
Output current
Continuous (3 x 380–439 V) [A] 24 32 37.5 44 61 73 90 106 147 177
Intermittent (3 x 380–439 V) [A] 26.4 35.2 41.3 48.4 67.1 80.3 99 117 162 195
Continuous (3 x 440–480 V) [A] 21 27 34 40 52 65 80 105 130 160
Intermittent (3 x 440–480 V) [A] 23.1 29.7 37.4 44 61.6 71.5 88 116 143 176
Continuous kVA (400 V AC) [kVA] 16.6 22.2 26 30.5 42.3 50.6 62.4 73.4 102 123
Continuous kVA 460 V AC) [kVA] 16.7 21.5 27.1 31.9 41.4 51.8 63.7 83.7 104 128
Max. cable size:
120/
(line power, motor, brake) [mm2/ 50/1/0 95/
10/7 35/2 MCM25
AWG] 2) (B4=35/2) 4/0
0
With line power disconnect 185/
16/6 35/2 35/2 70/3/0
switch included: kcmil350
Max. input current

Continuous (3 x 380–439 V) [A] 22 29 34 40 55 66 82 96 133 161

Intermittent (3 x 380–439 V) [A] 24.2 31.9 37.4 44 60.5 72.6 90.2 106 146 177
Continuous (3 x 440–480 V) [A] 19 25 31 36 47 59 73 95 118 145
Intermittent (3 x 440–480 V) [A] 20.9 27.5 34.1 39.6 51.7 64.9 80.3 105 130 160
Max. pre-fuses1)[A] 63 63 63 63 80 100 125 160 250 250
Environment
Estimated power loss
278 392 465 525 698 739 843 1083 1384 1474
at rated max. load [W] 4)
Weight enclosure IP20 [kg] 12 12 12 23.5 23.5 23.5 35 35 50 50
Weight enclosure IP 21 [kg] 23 23 23 27 27 45 45 45 65 65
Weight enclosure IP 55 [kg] 23 23 23 27 27 45 45 45 65 65
Weight enclosure IP 66 [kg] 23 23 23 27 27 45 45 45 65 65

TR200 Instruction Manual

Efficiency 3) 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.99

Table 8. 4: Line Power Supply 3 x 380–480 V AC

 Line power supply 3 x 525–600 VACNormal overload 110% for 1 minute
P3
Size: P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5 P11K P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K P45K P55K P75K P90K
K7
Typical Shaft Output [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
IP 20 / Chassis A3 A3 A3 A3 A2 A3 A3 A3 B3 B3 B3 B4 B4 B4 C3 C3 C4 C4
IP 21 / NEMA 1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A2 A3 A3 A3 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
IP 55 / NEMA 12 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2
IP 66 / NEMA 12 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 A5 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 C1 C1 C1 C2 C2

TR200 Instruction Manual

Output current
Continuous
2.6 2.9 4.1 5.2 - 6.4 9.5 11.5 19 23 28 36 43 54 65 87 105 137
(3 x 525–550 V) [A]
Intermittent
2.9 3.2 4.5 5.7 - 7.0 10.5 12.7 21 25 31 40 47 59 72 96 116 151
(3 x 525–550 V) [A]
Continuous
2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9 - 6.1 9.0 11.0 18 22 27 34 41 52 62 83 100 131
(3 x 525–600 V) [A]
Intermittent
2.6 3.0 4.3 5.4 - 6.7 9.9 12.1 20 24 30 37 45 57 68 91 110 144
(3 x 525–600 V) [A]
Continuous kVA
2.5 2.8 3.9 5.0 - 6.1 9.0 11.0 18.1 21.9 26.7 34.3 41 51.4 61.9 82.9 100 130.5
(525 V AC) [kVA]
Continuous kVA
2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9 - 6.1 9.0 11.0 17.9 21.9 26.9 33.9 40.8 51.8 61.7 82.7 99.6 130.5
(575 V AC) [kVA]
Max. cable size, IP 120/
21/55/66 MCM
4/ 10/ 25/ 50/ 95/
(line power, motor, 250
10 7 4 1/0 4/0
brake)
[mm2]/[AWG] 2)
Max. cable size, IP 150/
20 MCM
4/ 16/ 35/ 50/ 95/
(line power, motor, 250
10 6 2 1/0 4/0
brake) 5)
[mm2]/[AWG] 2)
With line power dis- 185/
70/3/
connect 4/10 16/6 35/2 kcmil
0
switch included: 350

Table 8. 5: 5) With brake and load sharing 95/ 4/0

8-5
Specifications
8-6
Line power supply 3 x 525–600 VACNormal overload 110% for 1 minute - continued
P3
Size: P1K1 P1K5 P2K2 P3K0 P4K0 P5K5 P7K5 P11K P15K P18K P22K P30K P37K P45K P55K P75K P90K
K7
Max. input current
Continuous
2.4 2.7 4.1 5.2 - 5.8 8.6 10.4 17.2 20.9 25.4 32.7 39 49 59 78.9 95.3 124.3
Specifications

(3 x 525–600 V) [A]
Intermittent
2.7 3.0 4.5 5.7 - 6.4 9.5 11.5 19 23 28 36 43 54 65 87 105 137
(3 x 525–600 V) [A]
Max. pre-fuses1) [A] 10 10 20 20 - 20 32 32 63 63 63 63 80 100 125 160 250 250
Environment:
Estimated power loss
at rated max. load [W] 50 65 92 122 - 145 195 261 300 400 475 525 700 750 850 1100 1400 1500
4)
Weight enclosure
6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 - 6.5 6.6 6.6 12 12 12 23.5 23.5 23.5 35 35 50 50
IP20 [kg]
Weight enclosure 13.
13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 14.2 14.2 23 23 23 27 27 27 45 45 65 65
IP21/55 [kg] 5
Efficiency 4) 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 - 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98

Table 8. 6: 5) With brake and load sharing 95/ 4/0

TR200 Instruction Manual

 Specifications

Line power supply (L1, L2, L3):

Supply voltage 200–240 V ±10%, 380–480 V ±10%, 525–690 V ±10%
AC line voltage low / line drop-out:
During low AC line voltage or a line drop-out, the adjustable frequency drive continues until the intermediate
circuit voltage drops below the minimum stop level, which corresponds typically to 15% below the adjustable
frequency drive's lowest rated supply voltage. Power-up and full torque cannot be expected at AC line voltage
lower than 10% below the adjustable frequency drive's lowest rated supply voltage.
Supply frequency 50/60 Hz ±5%
Max. imbalance temporary between line phases 3.0% of rated supply voltage
True Power Factor () ≥ 0.9 nominal at rated load
Displacement Power Factor (cos) near unity (> 0.98)
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≤ enclosure type A maximum twice/min.
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≥ enclosure type B, C maximum once/min.
Switching on input supply L1, L2, L3 (power-ups) ≥ enclosure type D, E, F maximum once/2 min.
Environment according to EN60664-1 overvoltage category III / pollution degree 2
The unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes,
480/600 V maximum.
Motor output (U, V, W):
Output voltage 0–100% of supply voltage
Output frequency 0–1000 Hz*
Switching on output Unlimited
Ramp times 1–3600 sec.
* Dependent on power size.
Torque characteristics:
Starting torque (Constant torque) maximum 110% for 1 min.*
Starting torque maximum 135% up to 0.5 sec.*
Overload torque (Constant torque) maximum 110% for 1 min.*
*Percentage relates to the adjustable frequency drive's nominal torque.
Cable lengths and cross-sections:
Max. motor cable length, shielded/armored TR200: 492 ft [150 m]
Max. motor cable length, unshielded/unarmored TR200: 984 ft [300 m]
Max. cross-section to motor, line power, load sharing and brake *
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, rigid
wire 0.0023 in2 [1.5 mm2]/16 AWG (2 x 0.001122 in [0.75 mm2])
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, flexible cable 0.0016 in2 [1 mm2]/18 AWG
Maximum cross-section to control terminals, cable with enclosed core 0.0008 in2 [0.5 mm2]/20 AWG
Minimum cross-section to control terminals 0.039 in2 [0.25 mm2]
* See Line Power Supply tables for more information!
Digital inputs:
Programmable digital inputs 4 (6)
Terminal number 18, 19, 27 1), 29 1), 32, 33,
Logic PNP or NPN
Voltage level 0–24 Vdc
Voltage level, logic'0' PNP < 5 Vdc
Voltage level, logic'1' PNP > 10 Vdc
Voltage level, logic '0' NPN > 19 Vdc
Voltage level, logic '1' NPN < 14 Vdc
Maximum voltage on input 28 Vdc
Input resistance, Ri approx. 4 kΩ
All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
1) Terminals 27 and 29 can also be programmed as output.

TR200 Instruction Manual 8-7

Specifications

Analog inputs:
Number of analog inputs 2
Terminal number 53, 54
Modes Voltage or current
Mode select Switch S201 and switch S202
Voltage mode Switch S201/switch S202 = OFF (U)
Voltage level : 0–+10 V (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 10 kΩ
Max. voltage ± 20 V
Current mode Switch S201/switch S202 = ON (I)
Current level 0/4 to 20 mA (scaleable)
Input resistance, Ri approx. 200 Ω
Max. current 30 mA
Resolution for analog inputs 10 bit (+ sign)
Accuracy of analog inputs Max. error 0.5% of full scale
Bandwidth : 200 Hz
The analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

Pulse inputs:
Programmable pulse inputs 2
Terminal number pulse 29, 33
Max. frequency at terminal, 29, 33 110 kHz (push-pull driven)
Max. frequency at terminal, 29, 33 5 kHz (open collector)
Min. frequency at terminal 29, 33 4 Hz
Voltage level see section on Digital input
Maximum voltage on input 28 Vdc
Input resistance, Ri approx. 4 kΩ
Pulse input accuracy (0.1–1 kHz) Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Analog output:
Number of programmable analog outputs 1
Terminal number 42
Current range at analog output 0/4–20 mA
Max. resistor load to common at analog output 500 Ω
Accuracy on analog output Max. error: 0.8% of full scale
Resolution on analog output 8 bit
The analog output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control card, RS-485 serial communication:
Terminal number 68 (P,TX+, RX+), 69 (N,TX-, RX-)
Terminal number 61 Common for terminals 68 and 69
The RS-485 serial communication circuit is functionally seated from other central circuits and galvanically iso-
lated from the supply voltage (PELV).

8-8 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Specifications

Digital output:
Programmable digital/pulse outputs 2
Terminal number 27, 29 1)
Voltage level at digital/frequency output 0–24 V
Max. output current (sink or source) 40 mA
Max. load at frequency output 1 kΩ
Max. capacitive load at frequency output 10 nF
Minimum output frequency at frequency output 0 Hz
Maximum output frequency at frequency output 32 kHz
Accuracy of frequency output Max. error: 0.1% of full scale
Resolution of frequency outputs 12 bit
1) Terminal 27 and 29 can also be programmed as input.
The digital output is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control card, 24 Vdc output:
Terminal number 12, 13
Max. load : 200 mA
The 24 Vdc supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV), but has the same potential as the
analog and digital inputs and outputs.
Relay outputs:
Programmable relay outputs 2
Relay 01 Terminal number 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO) (Resistive load) 240 V AC, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 Vac, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 1-2 (NO), 1-3 (NC) (Resistive load) 60 Vdc, 1A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) (Inductive load) 24 Vdc, 0.1A
Relay 02 Terminal number 4-6 (break), 4-5 (make)
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load)2)3) 400 Vac, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 Vac, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Resistive load) 80 Vdc, 2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-5 (NO) (Inductive load) 24 Vdc, 0.1 A
Max. terminal load (AC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 240 Vac, 2 A
Max. terminal load (AC-15)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load @ cosφ 0.4) 240 Vac, 0.2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-1)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Resistive load) 50 Vdc, 2 A
Max. terminal load (DC-13)1) on 4-6 (NC) (Inductive load) 24 Vdc, 0.1 A
Min. terminal load on 1-3 (NC), 1-2 (NO), 4-6 (NC), 4-5 (NO) 24 Vdc 10 mA, 24 Vac 20 mA
Environment according to EN 60664-1 overvoltage category III/pollution degree 2
1) IEC 60947 t 4 and 5
The relay contacts are galvanically isolated from the rest of the circuit by reinforced isolation (PELV).
2) Overvoltage Category II
3) UL applications 300 Vac 2 A

TR200 Instruction Manual 8-9

Specifications

Control card, 10 V DC output:

Terminal number 50
Output voltage 10.5 V ±0.5 V
Max. load 25 mA
The 10 Vdc supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.
Control characteristics:
Resolution of output frequency at 0–1000 Hz : +/- 0.003 Hz
System response time (terminals 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33) : ≤ 2 ms
Speed control range (open-loop) 1:100 of synchronous speed
Speed accuracy (open-loop) 30–4000 rpm: Maximum error of ±8 rpm
All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor
Surroundings:
Enclosure type A IP 20/Chassis, IP 21kit/Type 1, IP55/Type12, IP 66/Type12
Enclosure type B1/B2 IP 21/Type 1, IP55/Type12, IP 66/12
Enclosure type B3/B4 IP20/Chassis
Enclosure type C1/C2 IP 21/Type 1, IP55/Type 12, IP66/12
Enclosure type C3/C4 IP20/Chassis
Enclosure type D1/D2/E1 IP21/Type 1, IP54/Type12
Enclosure type D3/D4/E2 IP00/Chassis
Enclosure type F1/F3 IP21, 54/Type1, 12
Enclosure type F2/F4 IP21, 54/Type1, 12
Enclosure kit available ≤ enclosure type D IP21/NEMA 1/IP 4X on top of enclosure
Vibration test enclosure A, B, C 1.0 g
Vibration test enclosure D, E, F 0.7 g
Relative humidity 5%–95% (IEC 721-3-3; Class 3K3 (non-condensing) during operation
Aggressive environment (IEC 60068-2-43) H2S test class Kd
Test method according to IEC 60068-2-43 H2S (10 days)
Ambient temperature (at 60 AVM switching mode)
- with derating max. 131°F [55°C]1)

- with full output power of typical EFF2 motors (up to 90% output current) max. 122°F [50 °C]1)
- at full continuous FC output current max. 113°F [45°C]1)
1) For more information on derating, see the Design Guide, section on Special Conditions.
Minimum ambient temperature during full-scale operation 32°F [0°C]
Minimum ambient temperature at reduced performance 14°F [- 10°C]
Temperature during storage/transport -13°–+149°/158°F [-25°–+65°/70°C]
Maximum altitude above sea level without derating 3280 ft [1000 m]
Maximum altitude above sea level with derating 9842 ft [3000 m]
Derating for high altitude, see section on special conditions.
EMC standards, Emission EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-3/4, EN 55011, IEC 61800-3
EN 61800-3, EN 61000-6-1/2,
EMC standards, Immunity EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-3, EN 61000-4-4, EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6
See section on special conditions!
Control card performance:
Scan interval : 5 ms
Control card, USB serial communication:
USB standard 1.1 (Full speed)
USB plug USB type B “device” plug

Connection to PC is carried out via a standard host/device USB cable.

The USB connection is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

8-10 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Specifications

The USB connection is not galvanically isolated from protection ground. Use only an isolated laptop/PC as the
connection to the USB connector on the adjustable frequency drive or an isolated USB cable/drive.
Protection and Features:
• Electronic thermal motor protection against overload.
• Temperature monitoring of the heatsink ensures that the adjustable frequency drive trips if the temper-
ature reaches 203°F ± 9°F [95°C ± 5°C]. An overload temperature cannot be reset until the temperature
of the heatsink is below 158°F ± 9°F [70°C ± 5°C] (Guideline - these temperatures may vary for different
power sizes, enclosures, etc.). The adjustable frequency drive has an auto derating function to avoid
its heatsink reaching 203°F [95°C].
• The adjustable frequency drive is protected against short-circuits on motor terminals U, V, W.
• If a line phase is missing, the adjustable frequency drive trips or issues a warning (depending on the
load).
• Monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage ensures that the adjustable frequency drive trips if the
intermediate circuit voltage is too low or too high.
• The adjustable frequency drive is protected against ground faults on motor terminals U, V, W.

TR200 Instruction Manual 8-11

Specifications

Special Conditions
Purpose of Derating
Derating must be taken into account when using the adjustable frequency drive at low air pressure (high alti-
tudes), at low speeds, with long motor cables, cables with a large cross-section or at high ambient temperature.
The required action is described in this section.

Derating for ambient temperature

90% adjustable frequency drive output current can be maintained up to max. 122°F [50°C] ambient temperature.

With a typical full load current of EFF 2 motors, full output shaft power can be maintained up to 122°F [50°C].
For more specific data and/or derating information for other motors or conditions, please contact Trane.

Automatic adaptations to ensure performance

The adjustable frequency drive constantly checks for critical levels of internal temperature, load current, high
voltage on the intermediate circuit and low motor speeds. As a response to a critical level, the adjustable fre-
quency drive can adjust the switching frequency and / or change the switching pattern in order to ensure the
performance of the adjustable frequency drive. The capability to automatically reduce the output current extends
the acceptable operating conditions even further.

Derating for low air pressure

The cooling capability of air is decreased at a lower air pressure.

At an altitude lower than 3,280 ft [1,000 m], no derating is necessary, but above 3,280 ft [1,000 m], the ambient
temperature (TAMB) or max. output current (Iout) should be derated in accordance with the diagram shown.

Figure 8. 1: Derating of output current versus altitude at TAMB, MAX for frame sizes A, B and C. At altitudes above
6,600 feet [2 km], please contact Trane regarding PELV.

An alternative is to lower the ambient temperature at high altitudes and thereby ensure 100% output current at
high altitudes. As an example of how to read the graph, the situation at 6,600 ft [2 km] is elaborated. At a
temperature of 113°F [45°C] (TAMB, MAX - 3.3 K), 91% of the rated output current is available. At a temperature
of 107°F [41.7°C], 100% of the rated output current is available.

8-12 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Specifications

Derating of output current versus altitude at TAMB, MAX for frame sizes D, E and F.

Derating for running at low speed

When a motor is connected to an adjustable frequency drive, it is necessary to make sure that the cooling of the
motor is adequate.
The level of heating depends on the load on the motor as well as the operating speed and time.

Constant torque applications (CT mode)

A problem may occur at low RPM values in constant torque applications. In a constant torque application, a
motor may overheat at low speeds due to less cooling air from the motor integral fan.
Therefore, if the motor is to be run continuously at an RPM value lower than half of the rated value, the motor
must be supplied with additional air-cooling (or a motor designed for this type of operation may be used).

An alternative is to reduce the load level of the motor by choosing a larger motor. However, the design of the
adjustable frequency drive limits the motor size.

Variable (quadratic) torque applications (VT)

In VT applications such as centrifugal pumps and fans, where the torque is proportional to the square of the
speed and the power is proportional to the cube of the speed, there is no need for additional cooling or de-rating
of the motor.

In the graphs shown below, the typical VT curve is below the maximum torque with de-rating and maximum
torque with forced cooling at all speeds.

TR200 Instruction Manual 8-13

Specifications

Maximum load for a standard motor at 104°F [40°C] driven by TR200 drive

Legend: ─ ─ ─ ─Typical torque at VT load ─•─•─•─Max torque with forced cooling ‒‒‒‒‒Max torque
Note 1) Oversyncronous speed operation will result in the available motor torque decreasing inversely pro-
portional to the increase in speed. This must be considered during the design phase to avoid overloading
the motor.

8-14 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Index

Index
A
Abbreviations And Standards 2-2
Ac Brake Max. Current 2-16 6-25
Ac Line Input Connections For A2 And A3 4-14
Ac Line Input Connections For B1, B2 And B3 4-17
Ac Line Input Connections For B4, C1 And C2 4-18
Ac Line Input Connections For C3 And C4 4-18
Acceleration Time 6-6
Access To Control Terminals 4-31
Accessory Bags 3-4
Adjustable Frequency Drive 4-36
Adjustable Frequency Drive Identification 2-2
Alarm/warning Code List 7-2
Alarms And Warnings 7-1
Ama 5-9
Analog Inputs 8-8
Analog Output 8-8
Auto Energy Optimization Compressor 6-20
Auto Energy Optimization Vt 6-20
Auto Tune 4-37
Automatic Adaptations To Ensure Performance 8-12
Automatic Motor Adaptation (ama) 4-37, 6-21
Awg 8-1

B
Brake Function 2-10 6-24
Branch Circuit Protection 4-7
Broken Belt Delay 22-62 6-54
Broken Belt Function 22-60 6-53
Broken Belt Torque 22-61 6-54

C
Cable Lengths And Cross-sections 8-7
Changes Made 6-1
Changing A Group Of Numeric Data Values 6-59
Changing A Text Value 6-59
Changing Data 6-58
Changing Of Data Value 6-60
Changing Parameter Data 6-1
Checklist 3-1
Closed-loop Type 20-70 6-49
Coast Inverse 6-3
Coasting 5-6
Communication Option 7-8
Configuration Mode 1-00 6-19
Constant Torque Applications (ct Mode) 8-13
Control Cables 4-7
Control Cables 4-6
Control Card Performance 8-10
Control Card, 10 V Dc Output 8-10
Control Card, 24 Vdc Output 8-9
Control Card, Rs-485 Serial Communication: 8-8
Control Card, Usb Serial Communication: 8-10
Control Characteristics 8-10
Control Terminals 4-32

TR200 Instruction Manual 9-1

Index

Cooling 6-23, 8-13

Cooling Conditions 3-5

D
Date Format 0-71 6-18
Dc Bus Connection 4-26
Dc Hold/preheat Current 2-00 6-24
Dc Link 7-5
Default Settings 6-61
Default Settings 5-10
Derating For Ambient Temperature 8-12
Derating For Low Air Pressure 8-12
Derating For Running At Low Speed 8-13
Digital Inputs, 5-1* Continued 6-30
Digital Inputs: 8-7
Digital Output 8-9
Display Line 1.1 Small 0-20 6-13
Display Text 1 0-37 6-18
Display Text 2 0-38 6-18
Display Text 3 0-39 6-18
Disposal Instructions 1-5
Dst/summertime 0-74 6-18
Dst/summertime End 0-77 6-19
Dst/summertime Start 0-76 6-19

E
Electrical Installation 4-6
Electrical Ratings 1-4
Electronic Waste 1-5
Example Of Changing Parameter Data 6-1

F
Fault Messages 7-5
Feedback 1 Conversion 20-01 6-43
Feedback 1 Source 20-00 6-43
Feedback 1 Source Unit 20-02 6-44
Feedback 2 Conversion 20-04 6-45
Feedback 2 Source 20-03 6-45
Feedback 3 Conversion 20-07 6-46
Feedback Function 20-20 6-46
Final Optimization And Test 4-36
Flying Start 1-73 6-22
Function At Stop 1-80 6-22
Function Relay 5-40 6-34
Function Set-ups 6-9
Fuses 4-7
Fusing Not Ul-compliant 4-8

G
General Specifications 8-6
Graphical Display 5-1
Grounding And It Line Power 4-12

H
High Power Series Line Power And Motor Connections 4-4
How To Connect A Pc To The Adjustable Frequency Drive 5-7
How To Connect Motor - Introduction 4-19
How To Connect To Line Power And Grounding For B1 And B2 4-17
How To Operate The Graphical 5-1

9-2 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Index

I
Indexed Parameters 6-60
Initialization 5-10
Installation At High Altitudes 1-3
Interval Between Starts 22-76 6-54

J
[Jog Speed Hz] 3-11 6-8
[Jog Speed Rpm] 3-19 6-8

K
Kty Sensor 7-6

L
Language 0-01 6-4
Language Package 1 6-4
Language Package 2 6-4
Leds 5-1, 5-4
Line Power Supply 8-1
Line Power Supply 8-5
Line Power Wiring Overview 4-13
Literature 2-1
Live Zero Timeout Function 6-01 6-36
Live Zero Timeout Time 6-00 6-36
Loggings 6-2
Low Speed Detection 22-22 6-51

M
Main Menu 6-58
Main Menu Mode 5-5
Main Menu Mode 6-58
Main Reactance 6-21
Maximum Boost Time 22-46 6-53
Maximum Feedback Level 20-74 6-50
Maximum Reference 3-03 6-25
Maximum Reference/feedb. 20-14 6-46
Mechanical Dimensions 3-3
Mechanical Mounting 3-5
Minimum Feedback Level 20-73 6-50
Minimum Reference 3-02 6-25
Minimum Reference/feedb. 20-13 6-46
Minimum Run Time 22-40 6-52, 6-54
Minimum Sleep Time 22-41 6-52
Motor Connection For C3 And C4 4-23
Motor Current 1-24 6-5
Motor Frequency 1-23 6-5
Motor Nameplate 4-36
Motor Nominal Speed 1-25 6-5
Motor Output 8-7
[Motor Power Hp] 1-21 6-5
[Motor Power Kw] 1-20 6-5
Motor Protection 6-23, 8-11
Motor Rotation Check 1-28 6-6
Motor Speed Direction 4-10 6-27
[Motor Speed High Limit Hz] 4-14 6-7
[Motor Speed High Limit Rpm] 4-13 6-7
[Motor Speed Low Limit Hz] 4-12 6-7
[Motor Speed Low Limit Rpm] 4-11 6-7

TR200 Instruction Manual 9-3

Index

Motor Thermal Protection 1-90 6-23

Motor Voltage 1-22 6-5
Motor Wiring Overview 4- 0
My Personal Menu 6-1

N
Nameplate Data 4-36
Nameplate Data. 4-36
No Operation 6-3
No-flow Delay 22-24 6-52
No-flow Function 22-23 6-52
Non-ul Fuses 200 V To 480 V 4-9

O
Output Performance (u, V, W) 8-7
Overmodulation 14-03 6-42
Over-voltage Control 2-17 6-25

P
Parameter Data 6-1
Parameter Set-up 6-55
Parameters For Quick Set-up 6-4
Pc Software Tools 5-8
Pid Auto Tuning 20-79 6-50
Pid Integral Time 20-94 6-51
Pid Normal/ Inverse Control 20-81 6-50
Pid Output Change 20-72 6-49
Pid Proportional Gain 20-93 6-51
[Pid Start Speed Hz] 20-83 6-51
[Pid Start Speed Rpm] 20-82 6-50
Preset Reference 3-10 6-26
Protection And Features 8-11
Pulse Inputs 8-8

Q
Quick Menu 5-4, 6-58
Quick Menu Mode 5-5, 6-1
Quick Set-up Parameters 6-4
Quick Transfer Of Parameter Settings When Using 5-9

R
Ramp 1 Ramp-down Time 3-42 6-6
Ramp 1 Ramp-up Time 3-41 6-6
Reference 1 Source 3-15 6-26
Reference 2 Source 3-16 6-27
Relay Connection 4-27
Relay Output 4-30
Relay Outputs 8-9
Rs-485 Bus Connection 5-7

S
Safety Note 1-2
Safety Regulations 1-2
Safety Requirements Of Mechanical Installation 3-6
Semi-auto Bypass Set-up 4-64 6-28
Serial Communication 8-10
Set Date And Time 0-70 6-18
Setpoint 1 20-21 6-49
Setpoint 2 20-22 6-49

9-4 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Index

Setpoint Boost 22-45 6-53

Shielded/armored. 4-7
Short Cycle Protection 22-75 6-54
Side-by-side Installation 3-5
Sine-wave Filter 4-19
Start Delay 1-71 6-21
Stator Leakage Reactance 6-21
Status 5-4
Status Messages 5-1
Step-by-step 6-60
Surroundings: 8-10
Switches S201, S202, And S801 4-35
Switching Frequency 14-01 6-42

T
Terminal 27 Digital Input 5-12 6-33
Terminal 27 Mode 5-01 6-28
Terminal 29 Mode 5-02 6-28
Terminal 42 Output 6-50 6-39
Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 6-52 6-40
Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 6-51 6-40
Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 6-16 6-38
Terminal 53 High Current 6-13 6-37
Terminal 53 High Ref./feedb. Value 6-15 6-37
Terminal 53 High Voltage 6-11 6-37
Terminal 53 Live Zero 6-17 6-38
Terminal 53 Low Current 6-12 6-37
Terminal 53 Low Ref./feedb. Value 6-14 6-37
Terminal 53 Low Voltage 6-10 6-37
Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 6-26 6-39
Terminal 54 High Current 6-23 6-38
Terminal 54 High Ref./feedb. Value 6-25 6-39
Terminal 54 High Voltage 6-21 6-38
Terminal 54 Live Zero 6-27 6-39
Terminal 54 Low Current 6-22 6-38
Terminal 54 Low Ref./feedb. Value 6-24 6-38
Terminal 54 Low Voltage 6-20 6-38
Thermistor 6-23
Thermistor Source 1-93 6-24
Time Format 0-72 6-18
Torque Characteristics 8-7
Torque Characteristics 1-03 6-20
[Trip Speed Low Hz] 1-87 6-22
[Trip Speed Low Rpm] 1-86 6-22
Tuning Mode 20-71 6-49
Two Ways Of Operating 5-1
Type Code String (t/c) 2-2
Type Code String Low And Medium Power 2-3

U
Ul Compliance/non-compliance 4-9
Ul Fuses, 200–240 V 4-10
Usb Connection. 4-32

V
Variable (quadratic) Torque Applications (vt) 8-13
Voltage Level 8-7

TR200 Instruction Manual 9-5

Index

W
Wake-up Ref./fb Difference 22-44 6-53
[Wake-up Speed Hz] 22-43 6-53
[Wake-up Speed Rpm] 22-42 6-52
Warning Against Unintended Start 1-3
Warning Feedback High 4-57 6-28
Warning Feedback Low 4-56 6-28
Warning Speed High 4-53 6-28
Wiring Example And Testing 4-26

9-6 TR200 Instruction Manual

 Instruction Manual

TR200

Literature Order Number BAS-SVX19B-EN

Date August 2009
Supersedes
www.trane.com

For more information, contact your local Trane Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the
office or e-mail us at comfort@trane.com right to change design and specifications without notice.
BAS-SVX19B-EN

August 2009 BAS-SVX19B-EN

130R0447 MG12H222 Rev. 2009-08-20

*MG12H222*